JP2018175698A - Pachinko game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a Pachinko game machine capable of effectively utilizing a correlation between a character and an index related to winning.SOLUTION: A main board acquires a predetermined winning/losing random number on the basis of satisfaction of a predetermined condition, holds a lottery on the basis of the acquired winning/losing random number, and performs processing for setting a profit state to a player in a situation in which a predetermined lottery result is obtained. A sub-main board can determine a list performance for displaying a plurality of characters A to H in a list in predetermined arrangement order on a performance display device, arrangement order of the characters A to H is determined by first, predetermined sorting, and second sorting based on a rule differing from that of the first sorting, and the arrangement order of the characters A to H determined once by the first sorting may be changed by the second sorting.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 25

Description

  The present invention relates to a pachinko gaming machine using a game ball or game medal as a game medium.

In general, a pachinko gaming machine is provided with a main control board that controls a game and a sub control board that performs control processing based on a command from the main control board. And among these, as a subcontrol board of a pachinko game machine, a payout control board, an effect control board, various display control boards, an electric decoration control board, an acoustic control board, etc. can be illustrated. Furthermore, in Pachinko gaming machines, various effects are performed using an effect control board, but as a type of effect, there is known a type that provides correlation between appearing characters and a big hit expectation (Patent Document 1) Such as paragraph 0046).
JP, 2009-011632, A

  By the way, in the pachinko gaming machine as described above, how to use the character in terms of effect is an element that affects the taste of the game. Further, the above-mentioned big hit expectation etc. is an index that can give information to the player as to whether or not a big hit is likely to occur. Then, how to associate the character with the index related to the hit and use it for presentation is an important element in enhancing the game's taste.

  The present invention has been made in view of these problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a pachinko gaming machine capable of effectively utilizing the correlation between a character and an index relating to a hit.

In order to solve the above-mentioned subject, the present invention is main control means (a main board etc.) which control progress of a game, and
A presentation control unit (such as a sub main board) that receives presentation control information (such as a main command) from the main control unit and performs control processing according to the presentation control information;
And image display means (such as a effect display device) for displaying an image according to the effect determined by the effect control means.
The main control means
A predetermined random number is acquired based on the fact that the game medium discharged into the game area flows down the game area and passes through a predetermined start area (such as the first start winning opening and the second start winning opening).
The random number is at least a big hit random number for a big hit lottery determination, a special symbol random number (such as a special symbol random number per special symbol) for determination of a special symbol indicating the result of the big hit lottery determination, and the special symbol And a fluctuation pattern random number for determining the fluctuation pattern,
Perform a big hit lottery determination to determine whether or not a big hit based on the big hit random number,
Perform special symbol lottery determination to determine the special symbol based on the special symbol random number,
Performing a fluctuation pattern lottery determination to determine the fluctuation pattern based on the fluctuation pattern random number;
Based on the results of the big hit lottery determination, the special symbol lottery determination, and the variation pattern lottery determination, the special symbol is variably displayed on the main control display means and then stopped and the result of the big hit lottery determination is a big hit In this case, a special game is executed to open a predetermined opening / closing area (such as a first large winning opening or a second large winning opening) a predetermined number of times after the stop display of the special symbol.
Based on the result of the special symbol lottery determination, it is possible to set a specific game (such as a probability change or a time reduction) that is advantageous to the player after the end of the special game,
Even if the game medium passes through the start area, when the start condition of the variable display of the special symbol is not satisfied, it is possible to store the special symbol hold storage information concerning the random number within a predetermined number,
The effect control means is
While receiving the effect control information based on the special symbol suspension storage information from the main control means, it is possible to execute pre-reading effect,
It is possible to determine a list effect that causes the image display means to list a plurality of characters in a predetermined arrangement order,
The arrangement order of the characters is determined by a predetermined first sort and a second sort based on a rule different from the first sort, and the arrangement order of the characters temporarily determined by the first sort is the second sort May be changed by
The effect control means is
The pachinko game machine is characterized in that the list effect can be executed to straddle the variable display of the special symbol a plurality of times.

  According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a pachinko gaming machine capable of effectively utilizing the correlation between the character and the index related to the hit.

It is a front view of a pachinko game machine of one example of the present invention. It is a rear view of a pachinko game machine. It is a block diagram which shows the function of a pachinko game machine. It is a block diagram showing the main substrate composition of a pachinko game machine. It is a block diagram which shows the basic functional means of a main board | substrate, a submain board | substrate, and a subsub board | substrate. (A) is explanatory drawing which shows a main-control display apparatus, (b) is a chart which shows the relationship between each indicator light in a main-control display apparatus, and a name. (A) is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a display in the fluctuation | variation of the production | presentation symbol in a presentation display apparatus, (b) is explanatory drawing which similarly shows the example of a display in the stop of production | presentation design. (A) is a table which shows a yes-no decision table, (b) is a table which shows a change pattern table for out-of-order. (A) is a chart showing the jackpot symbol determination table for the first lottery, (b) is a chart showing the jackpot symbol determination table for the second lottery, (c) shows the jackpot symbol judgment table used in the small hit It is a chart. (A) A chart showing the variation pattern table used at the time of losing, (b) a chart showing the variation pattern table used at the 15R big hit, (c) a chart showing the variation pattern table used at the 5R big hit and small hit It is. It is a flowchart which shows the control start process in the main board | substrate. It is a flowchart which shows the control start process following FIG. It is a flow chart which shows game progress interruption processing in the main board. It is a flowchart which shows the power-off process in the main board | substrate. It is a flowchart which shows the submain initialization process in a submain board | substrate. It is a flowchart which shows the main process in a submain board | substrate. It is a flowchart which shows the main command reception process in a submain board | substrate. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process in a submain board | substrate. It is an explanatory view showing a flow of gaming state in a pachinko gaming machine. (A) is an explanatory view showing a flow of a special game as a basis, and (b) is an explanatory view showing a flow in the case of executing a predetermined effect at a timing different from that of (a). (A) is explanatory drawing which shows an example of bullet mark advance, (b) is explanatory drawing which shows an example of a pending | holding display. (A) is an explanatory view showing an example of a fluctuation timer effect, (b-1) is an explanatory view showing a feature of a fluctuation pattern table related to a fluctuation block, (b-2) is a fluctuation pattern table shown in (b-1) It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of an effect which used, and (b-3) is explanatory drawing which shows the example of another effect. (A) is an explanatory view showing an example of the contents of a part of the variation pattern table, (b-1) is an explanatory view showing a modification of the contents of the part of the variation pattern table, (b-2) is another It is explanatory drawing which shows the modification of the content of the fluctuation pattern table of a part. It is an explanatory view showing the flow of the game state in the embodiment which performs the list effect. (A) is an explanatory view showing an example of effect display when a list effect is performed in a round effect, and (b) is an explanatory view showing an enlarged display example of a shift effect. (A) is a chart showing values relating to the first index and the second index in each case during the round effect and during the variable effect, and (b) a chart showing a calculation example of the winning percentage of each character during the round effect. (A) is a chart showing an example of calculation of winning percentage of each character when the normal frequency table is used during the fluctuation effect, (b) each character when the retiring effect using the limited frequency table is executed during the fluctuation effect as well FIG. 8C is a table showing an example of the winning percentage calculation example, and FIG. 8C is a table showing the winning rate calculation example of each character when the morale lowering effect using the limited frequency table is executed during the fluctuation effect. (A) is an explanatory view showing an example of effect display in the case of performing the "ALL_MAX_zone", (b) is an explanatory view showing an example of effect display in the case of performing "character K participation in the war". (A) is a chart showing the relationship between the number of time reductions and the limited frequency pattern table in the embodiment in which the list effect is changed according to the number of times reduced, and (b) is an illustration showing an example of effect display when annular list display is performed FIG.

Hereafter, the Example of the pachinko game machine which concerns on this invention is described. Here, first, the basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment will be described, and thereafter, the game procedure, effects, control mode, and the like in the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment will be described.
<Basic configuration of pachinko gaming machine>

  FIG. 1 shows a front view of a pachinko gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment. In the pachinko gaming machine 10, a gaming board 50 is attached to a gaming machine frame 11 described later. Among these, the game board 50 has different constituent elements such as an accessory and a design according to the model of the pachinko gaming machine 10. Furthermore, the gaming board 50 can be separated from the gaming machine frame 11 by releasing the electrical connection relationship with the gaming machine frame 11 or the structural connection relationship.

  In addition, by sharing the structural and electrical connection relationship with the gaming machine frame 11 with respect to the gaming board 50 of a plurality of types, so-called model changes in which the gaming machine frame 11 is shared between different types of models becomes possible. There is. In the following, first, the gaming machine frame 11 will be described, and then the board configuration of the gaming board 50 will be described.

  The gaming machine frame 11 described above has an outer frame 12, a front frame 13, and a lower front plate 14. Furthermore, a glass door 15 and a plate unit 16 are attached to the front frame 13. Among these, the outer frame 12 is a rectangular frame used to fix the pachinko game machine 10 at a predetermined position on an island facility in a game arcade (game arcade), and as shown in FIG. The front frame 13 having the door 15 and the tray unit 16 and the lower front plate 14 described above have an opening portion whose front side is closed.

  The front frame 13 is a structure provided with an outer shape that matches the opening of the outer frame 12, and is attached to the outer frame 12 via hinge mechanisms 15A and 15B shown on the left side in FIG. The front frame 13 is opened from the closed state with respect to the outer frame 12 by swinging forward with the left edge in FIG. 1 as the fixed end and the right edge as the free end.

  The locking of the front frame 13 to the outer frame 12 and the release from the outer frame 12 are performed via a lock device (not shown). That is, as shown in FIG. 1, the cylinder portion 17 of the lock device is disposed on the free end side of the front frame 13 and this cylinder portion 17 covers the lower portion of the front frame 13 as described above. The key hole is directed to the front of the pachinko gaming machine 10 through 16. When the game arcade clerk inserts a key into the keyhole of the cylinder 17 and turns this key, for example, counterclockwise, the free end of the front frame 13 is released from the lock device, and the front frame 13 is opened Become.

  With respect to such a front frame 13, the lower front plate 14 described above does not have a configuration for opening and closing like the front frame 13, and is fixed to the outer frame 12 so as not to move. The lower front plate 14 always closes the lower end portion of the front surface of the outer frame 12.

  The glass door 15 disposed at the front of the front frame 13 and the pan unit 16 are mounted on the front frame 13 via a hinge mechanism (not shown). Further, both the glass door 15 and the pan unit 16 can be independently rocked with the left edge in FIG. 1 as a fixed end and the right edge as a free end. Then, the glass door 15 and the plate unit 16 are opened by, for example, swinging the game arcade clerk horizontally horizontally forward, and are horizontally rocked backward from the opened state and locked to the front frame 13 It will be in a closed state.

  The locking of the glass door 15 to the front frame 13 and the release from the front frame 13 are performed via the aforementioned lock device (not shown). That is, when the game arcade clerk inserts a key into the keyhole of the above-mentioned cylinder 17 and turns this key clockwise, for example, in the reverse direction to the opening of the front frame 13, the free end of the glass door 15 is the lock device And the glass door 15 is opened.

  Further, by opening the glass door 15, the locking mechanism (not shown) of the plate unit 16 appears and becomes operable, and the operating section (not shown) of the locking mechanism is, for example, downward By pressing the plate unit 16 into the open state.

  Furthermore, the glass door 15 detachably holds, for example, two parallel transparent plates, and when in the closed state, the game board 50 can be viewed from the front of the pachinko gaming machine 10 through these transparent plates. It is like that. Besides the glass plate, a transparent resin plate can be used as the transparent plate.

  The tray unit 16 has an upper bowl 18, a lower bowl 19, a firing handle 20 and the like on its front surface. Among these, the upper ball tray 18 stores the game balls, supplies the game balls to the launch device 43 (see FIGS. 2 and 4) operated through the shooting handle 20, and plays the game to the lower ball tray 19 Mechanisms are provided for various functions such as ball evacuation. In addition, the lower ball tray 19 stores the game balls, receives the game balls sent from the upper ball tray 18, and sets the gaming balls to a ball box (a so-called dollar box) placed outside the pachinko gaming machine 10. Mechanisms are provided for various functions such as evacuation.

  Further, in the present embodiment, various speakers 21 are provided in the upper corner portion of the glass door 15, the lower front plate 14 and the like, and through the speakers 21, according to the game state, the effect pattern, etc. BGM and various sound effects are output.

  Further, an operation button 22 which can be pressed by the player is provided in a portion of the upper bowl plate 18 facing the player (see FIG. 1). The operation button 22 is provided on the outer wall surface of the upper portion of the upper bowl 18 and is located near the center of the upper bowl 18 in the left-right direction. In addition, the operation button 22 is internally provided with an operation button light emitter (not shown), and performs light output in accordance with the effect pattern to be executed.

Note that the operation button 22 may be configured to project upward or perform a vibrating operation in a predetermined case using a drive source such as a motor or a solenoid. Although illustration is omitted, in addition to the operation button 22, a cross key is provided, and various environment settings and effect operations can be performed by the player using this cross key. The contents of the environment setting can be exemplified by adjusting the volume of the speaker 21, adjusting the brightness and adjusting the amount of light of the effect display to be described later, or changing the effect mode to be described later. In addition, as the effect operation using the cross key, a mini game or the like in a variable display can be exemplified. Furthermore, besides the cross key, it is possible to use, for example, a lever-like operation means, a touch panel of various methods, and the like.
<Back composition of pachinko game machine>

  Next, a basic configuration on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 10 will be described. As shown in FIG. 2, on the back of the front frame 13, a set base 31 provided with a game ball passage or the like for guiding or collecting game balls is attached, and below the set base 31, a game machine A power supply unit 32 for supplying power to the whole, and a payout control board 103 for controlling the gaming machine frame side are attached. In addition, on the back side of the game board 50, a main board (main control board) 102 for overall control of the entire game, and a sub board 104 for executing effect control based on control commands from the main board 102 are set base 31 It is provided in the positional relationship corresponding to the opening of.

  In the set base 31, a prize ball tank 33 is provided above the opening described above. The prize ball tank 33 stores game balls which are supplied from the island facility and become prize balls. Furthermore, below the prize ball tank 33, a prize ball passage 34, a payout unit 35, and a prize ball discharge passage 36 are provided.

  The payout unit 35 communicates with the prize ball passage 34, and can eject the balls stored in the prize ball tank 33 downward in units of one ball. Further, the winning ball discharge passage 36 guides the gaming ball, which has flowed down from the payout unit 35, as a winning ball to the ball dish (upper ball dish 18 or lower ball dish 19).

  The power supply unit 32 described above is provided at the lower left portion of the set base 31 when the pachinko gaming machine 10 is viewed from the rear as shown in FIG. Then, the power supply unit 32 converts AC power supplied from the outside of the gaming machine into various voltages used in the gaming machine, and supplies the same to the payout control board 103, the main board 102, the sub board 104, and the like. In addition, the power supply unit 32 is provided with a power switch 40 which is a tilt switch.

  The above-mentioned payout control board 103 is disposed at the lower right part of the set base 31 when the pachinko gaming machine 10 is viewed from the rear as shown in FIG. Then, the payout control board 103 has a payout control function of controlling the payout unit 35 in accordance with an instruction relating to the payout from the main substrate 102 and a lending request from the outside. In addition, the payout control board 103 also has a launch control function of controlling the launch device 43 to launch the gaming ball into the gaming area at a strength corresponding to the operation amount of the launch handle 20 (see FIG. 1).

  The main board 102 described above is disposed at the lower center of the back side of the game board 50, and mainly uses various lottery functions, control functions for the payout control board 103 and the sub board 104, etc. It has the central processing function in 10). The above-described sub-substrate 104 is disposed at the upper central portion on the back side of the game board 50, and mainly has a function for controlling various effects to be described later.

With regard to the sub-substrate 104 described above, the main sub-substrate (sub main substrate 301 in the present embodiment) responsible for the main function of effect control and the sub sub-substrate specialized for a specific effect function such as image creation (this embodiment In the example, it is divided into sub-sub substrates 302), but the term "sub-substrate" includes these. Further, an external relay terminal board 46 for relaying signals from the main board 102, the payout control board 103 and the like to an external device of the pachinko gaming machine 10 is provided in the upper right part on the back side of the set board 31.
<Board configuration of game board>

  Next, the above-described gaming board 50 and parts (board parts) disposed on the board of the gaming board 50 will be described. In the present embodiment, the game board 50 is composed of a plurality of parts made of a transparent resin material (for example, a transparent acrylic resin or the like). Further, the game board 50 is formed in a plate shape, and has a game ball passage that guides the game ball to the back side of the game board 50, a predetermined space, and the like. The gaming board 50 is mounted on the front frame 13 of the gaming machine frame 11 with the board surface on which various board components are mounted facing forward, and the glass door 15 or the like in the closed state It is supposed to cover the front. Furthermore, on the front side of the game board 50, a game area 52 is defined by combining a curved band-like inner rail and an outer rail.

  As shown in FIG. 1, in the game area 52, the first start winning opening 62 and the second starting winning opening 63, the first large winning opening 91 and the second large winning opening 92, the left operation opening 68a and the right operation opening 68b, a plurality of general winning openings 72, and an out opening 58 and the like are provided. Further, the game area 52 is provided with an effect display device 60 composed of a liquid crystal display device capable of performing display for effects, a center decoration 64 for decorating the periphery of the effect display device 60, and the like.

In addition, the game area 52 is provided with a large number of game nails (not shown) and a mechanism such as a windmill. Further, a main control display device 53 is provided outside the lower left of the game area 52 of the game board 50. The specific configuration and function of the main control display device 53 will be described later. In addition, the above-described board configuration of the game board 50 may be variously changed depending on, for example, the game characteristics and the like adopted for the pachinko gaming machine 10. And, another embodiment according to the board configuration will be described later.
<Function of panel parts>

  Then, the specific function and structure which concern on each board component mentioned above are demonstrated. First, the above-mentioned first start winning opening 62 is a starting winning opening related to the first game, and is of a type in which the entrance of the game ball is always open and the size of the entrance of the game ball is not changed. Furthermore, the first starting winning opening 62 has a first starting winning detection device 74 (sensor) for detecting the ball entering of the gaming ball into the first starting winning opening 62, and the output signal of this sensor is the same as described above. Is input to the main board 102 of FIG.

  The above-mentioned second starting winning opening 63 is a starting winning opening related to the second game. The second start winning opening 63 is an ordinary electric combination (so-called "electric tulip" or "electric chew"), and when the ordinary symbol to be described later is stopped and displayed in the form of a hit, the blade (see FIG. It has an opening and closing blade). Then, the second start winning opening 63 opens the opening and closing blades for a predetermined time based on the operation of the ordinary electric combination and spreads, whereby the ball enters the second starting winning opening 63 of the gaming ball. It becomes possible.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 3, the second start winning opening 63 is provided with a second start winning detection device 75 (sensor) and a normal motorized combination solenoid 76 for opening and closing the above-mentioned opening and closing blade. . An output signal of the second start winning detection device 75 is input to the main board 102.

  Moreover, in the present embodiment, a plurality of types are provided as modes for opening the second start winning opening 63. In these open modes, a mode for a relatively short time (for example, about 0.2 seconds) (referred to as “short open” or “short open”) or a relatively long time (for example, about 5 seconds) There are modes (referred to as “long open”, “long open”, etc.) and the like. It is also possible to provide a mode of middle opening set to the opening time between the short opening and the long opening. And the various opening aspects which concern on the 2nd starting winning a prize mouth 63 are mentioned below.

  The above-mentioned general winning opening 72 is provided with a general winning detection device 73 (sensor) for detecting the entering of the game ball, as shown in FIG. The output signal of the general winning detection device 73 is input to the main board 102.

  Then, when the general winning detection device 73 is shared by a plurality of general winning openings 72, the gaming balls having a plurality of general winning openings 72 entering are collected at a location where the general winning detection device 73 is disposed, and detection is performed. It is possible. Further, it is also possible to group a plurality of general winning openings 72 for each positional relationship or for the number of winning balls (shared by the general winning detection device 73). In addition, the specific aspect which concerns on payment of a prize ball is mentioned later.

  The aforementioned first large winning opening 91 has an opening formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape. Furthermore, the first big winning opening 91 is provided with a first open / close door (not shown) for opening and closing the above-mentioned opening. Then, when a predetermined hit occurs, the first big winning opening 91 performs an opening operation in a predetermined manner.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 3, the first large winning opening 91 is a first large winning detection device 78 for detecting game ball entry and a first large opening / closing drive of the above-mentioned first opening / closing door. The winning opening solenoid 80 is provided. Among these, the first big prize detection device 78 has a sensor for detecting the entry of the gaming ball into the first big prize hole 91, and the output signal thereof is inputted to the main board 102.

  The above-mentioned second large winning opening 92 has an opening formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape. Furthermore, the second big winning opening 92 is provided with a second opening and closing door (not shown) for opening and closing the above-mentioned opening. Then, the second large winning opening 92 performs an opening operation in a predetermined manner when a predetermined hit occurs.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 3, the second big winning opening 92 is a second big winning detection device 79 for detecting the entering of the game ball, and a second large opening / closing drive of the above-mentioned second opening / closing door. A winning opening solenoid 81 is provided. Among these, the second big prize detection device 79 has a sensor that detects the entry of the gaming ball into the first big prize hole 91, and the output signal thereof is inputted to the main board 102.

  In the present embodiment, decorative plates 91 b and 92 b are respectively provided in front of the first large winning opening 91 and the second large winning opening 92. The decorative plates 91b and 92b are made of a transparent material so that the player can visually recognize the first opening / closing door, the second opening / closing door, the first large winning opening 91, and the second large winning opening 92. . In addition, characters or figures for decorating the game area 52 may be drawn on each decorative board, but also in this case, the first large winning opening 91 and the second large winning opening 92 It is desirable that the degree is such that the visual recognition of the entering game ball is not impeded.

  The aforementioned left working port 68a is provided with a left passage detecting device 69a, as shown in FIG. 3, and the right working port 68b is provided with a right passage detecting device 69b. Furthermore, these passage detection devices 69a, 69b have sensors for detecting passage of gaming balls in the corresponding operation openings 68a, 68b. And the output signal of the sensor in each passage detection device 69a, 69b is inputted into the main board 102, and each passage detection device 69a, 69b changes the output signal of the sensor according to the presence or absence of the ball.

  The center decoration 64 described above has a function of presentation and the like, and inside the center decoration 64, an LED substrate on which a large number of chip-type LEDs are mounted is provided. Then, by driving the LED of the center decoration 64, the light of the LED passes through the center decoration 64, and the center decoration 64 performs light decoration.

  The center decoration 64 is provided with movable effect members 93 and 94 and the like, and these movable effect members 93 and 94 constitute a gimmick for effect. Furthermore, the game ball passage 65 is formed on the right side of the center decoration 64 as viewed from the front, and the center decoration 64 has the function of the flow path of the game ball in addition to the rendering function as described above. Have.

  Further, the center decoration 64 is provided with a light guide plate 90. As the light guide plate 90, although not shown, it is possible to employ, for example, one provided with two transparent plates arranged in parallel with the plate surface facing forward and backward. Furthermore, the light guide plate 90 is attached to the center decoration 64 and shields between the outside and the inside of the center decoration 64 in front of the effect display device 60. The light guide plate 90 also functions as a protective cover of the effect display device 60 at the center decoration 64.

  The light guide plate 90 can be configured, for example, as follows. That is, inside the center decoration 64, a plurality of LEDs serving as light sources are arranged in a band shape so as to face one end face of the transparent plate, for example, one of the left and right end faces. In normal times, the display content of the effect display device 60 is transmitted to the outside of the transparent plate so that the player can visually recognize without overlapping another image on the screen of the effect display device 60.

  However, in each of the transparent plates constituting the light guide plate 90, fine irregularities which can not be visually recognized under a normal environment are formed. Then, at the time of execution of a predetermined effect, for example, the above-described light source facing the end face of one of the transparent plates is driven, and the light of the light source is irradiated toward the inside of the transparent plate from the end face of the transparent plate Ru. Further, the light is diffused by the unevenness of the transparent plate irradiated with the light, and a predetermined illustration or the like is colored and floated so as to be recognizable to the player by the diffused light.

  Moreover, the unevenness | corrugation for forming the image different from the above-mentioned illustration etc. is incised by the other transparent plate among two transparent plates of the light-guide plate 90. As shown in FIG. Then, by driving the light source facing the end face at the time of a predetermined effect, an illustration different from the above-mentioned ones appears so as to be recognizable to the player.

  Here, it is possible to face the light source not only to one of the left and right end faces of the transparent plate but also to one of the upper and lower end faces, and to project another illustration or the like by the light of this light source. By doing this, it is possible to display two types of images per one transparent plate. Further, the number of transparent plates may be one, or three or more. Moreover, it is also possible to use a transmissive liquid crystal display in place of or in combination with the light guide plate 90.

  As shown in FIG. 6A, the main control display device 53 described above is obtained by arranging a large number of 7-segment display bodies and LED display lights on a symbol display substrate (main symbol display substrate) 256. The main control display device 53 includes a normal symbol display portion 59 for displaying the above-mentioned normal symbol, a first special symbol display portion 70 for displaying a first special symbol (to be described later) corresponding to the first game, a second game A second special symbol display unit 71 for displaying a second special symbol (described later) corresponding to and a variety of other display units are formed. In addition, the above-mentioned normal symbol display part 59 comprises the normal symbol display apparatus. Further, the first special symbol display unit 70 constitutes a first special symbol display device, and the second special symbol display unit 71 constitutes a second special symbol display device. Further, details of each display unit formed in the main control display device 53 will be described later.

Also, in the following, the ordinary symbol is "common figure", the special symbol is "special figure", the first special symbol is "first special figure", "special figure 1", "special 1", the second special symbol " It may be called "second special view", "special view 2", "special 2", or the like. Furthermore, the first special symbol may be referred to as "special symbol 1" or "symbol 1" or the like, and the second special symbol may be referred to as "special symbol 2" or "symbol 2" or the like.
<Basic game procedure>

  Subsequently, the game procedure in the pachinko gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described. First, in the situation where the gaming ball is supplied to the above-mentioned upper bowl plate 18, when the player operates and rotates the above-mentioned firing handle 20, the upper bowl plate 18 with the strength according to the rotation angle. The game balls stored in the game are fired one by one at predetermined intervals. Then, the gaming balls are guided by the above-mentioned inner rails and outer rails, reach the upper part of the gaming area 52, and are released to the gaming area 52 from between the inner rails and the outer rails.

  In a normal game, the player shoots so that the game ball flows down on the left side of the game area 52, and targets the first start winning opening 62 located in the lower central portion of the game area 52. A mode of firing that mainly uses the left side of such a game area 52 is called a so-called left strike. In addition, while the player is operating the firing handle 20, the firing of the game ball is repeated by the above-described launching device 43 at a predetermined time interval (for example, an interval of not more than 100 shots per minute). Then, the game balls discharged continuously in the game area 52, while interfering with a plurality of game nails, a windmill, etc., drop in a direction according to factors such as the speed and the incident angle (or reflection angle).

  When the gaming ball falls into various winning openings such as the general winning opening 72 and the first start winning opening 62 described above, ball entry is detected, and payout control of the gaming ball is performed. Then, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out to the upper ball tray 18 as a winning ball through the above-described payout unit 35 in accordance with the type of winning opening that has entered the ball. In addition, when the upper ball tray 18 is filled with many game balls and the paid-out subsequent game balls can not enter the upper ball tray 18, these game balls are led to the lower ball tray 19 as a flood ball. .

  The game balls dropped into the various winning openings become safe balls and are guided from the front side to the back side of the game board 50. Also, the game ball that did not become a safe ball reaches the lower end of the game area 52 and drops into the out port 58, and is guided to the back side of the game board 50. The gaming balls having reached the back side of the gaming board 50 are guided downward through the predetermined guiding rod and the gaming ball passage in the set base 31 and directed from the pachinko gaming machine 10 to the side of the aforementioned island facilities. Discharged.

  Unlike the above-described winning opening that generates the safe ball, the left operating opening 68a and the right operating opening 68b are gates through which the game balls pass. In the following, the left operation opening 68a and the right operation opening 68b are taken as the "prize opening", and the terms "drop", "ball entry" and "win" in the present embodiment are "pass" related to the gate. It shall contain the meaning.

  When the game ball enters the operating opening (here, the left operating opening 68a or the right operating opening 68b), the main control is performed if a predetermined change start condition (general drawing change start condition) described later is satisfied. In the display device 53, a normal symbol (described later) is variably displayed. The normal symbol displayed on the main control display device 53 indicates the result of the random number lottery (general drawing lottery) executed based on entering the ball into the operation opening, and is stopped and displayed after a predetermined fluctuation time. Ru.

  When the game ball enters the starting opening (here, the first start winning opening 62 or the second starting winning opening 63), a predetermined change start condition (special figure change start condition) described later is satisfied. For example, in the main control display device 53, a special symbol (described later) is variably displayed. The special symbol displayed on the main control display device 53 indicates the result of random number lottery (big hit lottery) executed based on entering the starting opening, and is stopped after a predetermined fluctuation time. .

  In the above-described effect display device 60, effect display relating to a special symbol is performed. In this effect display, whether the special symbol is in a variable display or in a stop display, or the stop display mode of the special symbol is a big hit, or it is a difference. Relatedly, effects of various predetermined aspects are performed.

  In the special game (big hit), a unit game in which the first large winning opening 91 or the second large winning opening 92 is opened is repeated multiple times. Furthermore, special games include those in which unit games are repeated the maximum number of times and those in which unit games are repeated the number of times smaller than the maximum number. As the maximum number of times, 15 times (15R (round)) can be exemplified, and as the number of times smaller than the maximum number of times, 5 times (5R) or the like can be exemplified. In addition, the special game in the case of playing the unit game in which the opening of the special winning opening is executed only once is referred to as the "small hit".

  In each unit game, when a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are detected in the corresponding large winning opening (first large winning opening 91 or second large winning opening 92), or the total opening time When the predetermined time (for example, about 30 seconds) is reached, the termination condition is satisfied, and the corresponding special winning opening is closed. Setting the total opening time as the termination condition of the unit game indicates that the upper limit value is determined even in the case where opening of the large winning opening is performed in multiple times during one unit game. ing. By giving multiple opening of the big winning opening in the unit game, to increase the technical intervention, or to be able to easily get out balls by performing in one opening, such as to give a wide range of game characteristics during the big hit, The opening mode of the special winning opening can be selected from preset patterns.

  Furthermore, in the pachinko gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, as described above, a gaming property is adopted in which a plurality of (here, two) games corresponding to the first type pachinko gaming machine referred to in the prior art are mixed. That is, in the present embodiment, the plurality of games described above can be divided into a first game in which the first start winning opening 62 is used and a second game in which the second starting winning opening 63 is used. And, in a situation where the second game is prioritized over the first game, and at the same time the game start condition is satisfied, the second game is prioritized and executed, and the first game is held, One game and the second game are not executed at the same time.

  Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, a specific game may be executed after the end of the special game in accordance with the result of the above-mentioned big hit lottery. This specific game is a game state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game, in a mode different from the special game described above. In the present embodiment, a probability fluctuation game (hereinafter referred to as “probable change”), a fluctuation time shortening game (hereinafter referred to as “time reduction”), and an entry facilitation game are provided as specific games. As a specific game, there is a game that executes only one of a definite change, a short time, and an entry facilitation game, and a plurality of specific games are played at the same time.

  When the specific game is executed, a notification (for example, an effect that urges to hit the right) regarding the launch position and launch timing of the gaming ball recommended by the image and sound of the effect display device 60 is executed. Then, when the player increases the pivoting amount of the firing handle 20 clockwise to strengthen the firing force and shoots the game ball toward the right area of the game area 52, the game ball passing above the center decoration 64 , Enters the game ball passage portion 65 of the center decoration 64, and flows down the center decoration 64. Furthermore, the game balls discharged from the center decoration 64 fall in the direction according to the hitting while hitting the plurality of game nails and other structures.

  Some of the many game balls released from the center decoration 64 pass through the right operation opening 68b (see FIG. 1) and are detected by the right passage detection device 69b (see FIG. 3). As described above, when the gaming ball passes through the right operation opening 68b, the above-mentioned normal symbol is variably displayed on the main control display device 53 (see FIG. 6A), and the fluctuation display of the regular symbol is a predetermined hit. When stopped in the mode, the normal motorized part of the second start winning opening 63 hits and expands according to the mode for a predetermined time.

  In the present embodiment, it is possible to guide the game ball reaching the right side of the game area 52 around the second start winning opening 63 and the second big winning opening 92 by nails or the like. Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the entry facilitation game is added to the specific game at a short time, and during the short time, the opening extension of the ordinary electric role by the entry facilitation game, the ordinary electric role Probability fluctuation of the object, time-saving combination of the ordinary motorized combination is performed, and the aforementioned long open of the commonly used electric combination becomes easy to be executed. Then, during the time saving, one or more game balls can enter the second start winning opening 63 when the ordinary electric winning combination of the second starting winning opening 63 is expanded once. ing.

In addition, when a big hit occurs and a special game is executed, the first large winning opening 91 and the second large winning opening 92 are opened, but during this special game, the player is hit to the right It is possible to And, in this case, it is possible to execute an effect that urges the player to hit the right by an image, sound or the like of the effect display device 60 before the start of the special game.
<Example of big hit type: ST>

  Next, the types of jackpots in the above-described first game and second game will be described. First, as a big hit, a big hit repeating the above-mentioned unit game 15 times (hereinafter referred to as “15R big hit” as appropriate) and a big hit repeating unit game seven times (hereinafter referred to as “7R big hit”) are provided. . In addition, about the lottery aspect of these big hit, it mentions later.

  The above-mentioned unit game is started with the opening of the first large winning opening 91 (or the second large winning opening 92) in the special game, and when the predetermined time (for example, about 30 seconds) has elapsed, or the first large The game ends when a predetermined number (for example, 10 or more) of game balls fall into the winning opening 91 (or the second large winning opening 92), and the first large winning opening 91 (or the second large winning opening 92) is closed. Do. The special game which repeats such a unit game is basically based on the so-called game with the goal of causing the player to acquire a game ball (sometimes referred to as a ball). Further, among various jackpots, 15R jackpots and 7R jackpots are intended to make the player acquire a relatively large number of game balls.

  However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is possible to provide a type (15R normal or 7R normal) that does not become a definite variation, for example, in 15R big hit or part of 15R big hit as a part of the big hit. Also, for example, even if it is a 15R big hit, the opening period of the first big winning opening 91 (or the second big winning opening 92) is short, and it is possible to obtain substantially the same level of balls as the 5R big hit (15R It is possible to set a definite change (actual 5R) or to set a thing that even if it is a 5R big hit, it is almost impossible to obtain a ball.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the specific gaming state such as the above-mentioned probability change or time-shortening occurs for a predetermined specific big hit. As a generation mode of such a specific gaming state, for example, it is possible to provide a jackpot which does not give at least one copy among the bonus functions such as a probability change, a time reduction, and an entry facilitation game. More specifically, it is conceivable to provide a big hit with only a definite change or a big hit with only a short time. Furthermore, it is possible to make the type of jackpot different depending on the difference in the duration of the definite variation or the difference in the duration of the short time. In addition, in the case where the electric chow support is executed together in the short time, the "short time duration" can be reworded as "the electric chow support duration". Furthermore, it is also conceivable to execute only the electric chew support among the time saving and the electric chow support.

However, the combination of the jackpot and the probability variation or the time-short etc is not limited to that of the present embodiment, and various combinations can be adopted. For example, a probability change may occur for all the big hits. In this case, all of the 15R jackpots in the present embodiment are 15R jackpots with definite variation (15R probability variations), and all of the 7R jackpots are 7R jackpots with definite variation (7R probability variations).
<A hit other than a big hit>

Also, in the present embodiment, a small hit is provided as a type of hit other than the big hit. When the small hit occurs in the first game (or the second game), the first large winning opening 91 (or the second large winning opening 92) is opened, for example, once. In addition, about the lottery aspect of a small hit, it mentions later.
<Main control display device>
<< Configuration of main control display device >>

  Next, the above-mentioned main control display device 53 will be described based on FIG. The main control display device 53 has a segment display body and a large number of LED indicator lights arranged on a symbol display substrate 256, and a transparent plate is stacked in front of various display bodies. Further, as shown in FIG. 6A, the main control display device 53 is a first state indicator light 231 and a second state indicator light 232 in order from the left on the upper left portion of the symbol display substrate 256 as viewed from the front. , The main control error indicator light 233.

  The first status indicator 231 arranges two linear LED segments in a line to form a digit in the form of numeral "1". The second status indicator 232 combines seven linear LED segments to constitute a digit in the form of the numeral "8". Further, the main control error indicator 233 is constituted by a true circular main control error indicator dot provided at the lower right of the second status indicator 232.

  The first status indicator 231 and the second status indicator 232 described above can selectively display the LED of each segment to enable display of numbers 0 to 19, alphabet letters, hyphens and other symbols, etc. It has become. In addition, by making the LED blink and the blinking pattern different, it is possible to display more various information. The first status indicator light 231 and the second status indicator light 232 are used, for example, to display the number of rounds when a big hit occurs in the aforementioned first game or second game and a special game is executed. . Further, the main control error indicator 233 can be used, for example, for displaying an error.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 6A, on the symbol display substrate 256, two, four, ten and ten LED indicator lamps are arranged side by side at a predetermined pitch from the top. Then, the total of 26 LED indicator lights are the remaining portions of the portion where the first state indicator 231, the second state indicator 232, and the main control error indicator 233 are arranged on the symbol display substrate 256. In orderly. Here, in FIG. 6A, for convenience of explanation, the symbols of A to Z are described on a total of 26 LED indicator lights. And in the following description, each LED display lamp may be distinguished by the code | symbol of AZ attached | subjected in FIG. 6 (a).

  These LED indicator lights A to Z can also display predetermined information according to the presence or absence of lighting and the blinking pattern. FIG. 6B shows the relationship between the LED indicator lights A to Z shown in FIG. 6A and the names. Among these, the LED indicator lights A to C are a first symbol storage display first LED, a second symbol storage display second LED, and a normal symbol display LED according to a normal symbol described later. Further, the LED indicator lights D and E are a third state indicator light and a fourth state indicator light, and the LED indicator light F is, for example, a right turn indicator light that lights up when the above-mentioned right turn should be performed. Among these, the third status indicator (D) is used to indicate the operating status of the probability variation function related to the special symbol, and the fourth status indicator (E) is the operating status of the probability variation function related to the normal symbol Used for the display of

  Furthermore, eight of the LED indicator lights G to N constitute a first special symbol display unit 70, and the LED indicator lights O and P are a first special symbol memory display first LED and a first special symbol memory, respectively. It is a second display LED. Also, eight of the LED indicator lights Q to X constitute a second special symbol display unit 71, and the LED indicator lights Y and Z are a first special symbol memory display first LED and a second special symbol memory, respectively. It is a second display LED. In addition, in FIG. 6 (a), in order to attach a code | symbol to the normal symbol display part 59, the 1st special symbol display part 70, and the 2nd special symbol display part 71, each LED display lamp is enclosed with the symbol of a brace. Is shown.

  The above-mentioned normal symbol display part 59 is constituted by one LED indicator light C, and according to the operation mode of this LED indicator light C, the variation display and the stop display of the normal symbol are performed. In addition, as operation | movement of the normal symbol display part 59, it is possible to distinguish and display many types (for example, three or more types) of information by the difference of lighting and blink, the difference of a blink cycle, etc. In addition, it is desirable to display the lottery result which concerns on a normal symbol by lighting or extinguishing from a viewpoint of clarity concerning the stop display of a normal symbol. Therefore, the number of LED indicator lamps constituting the normal symbol display section 59 may be, for example, two or more, and the stop symbol of the normal symbol may be represented by a combination of lighting and extinguishing.

  The above-mentioned first special symbol display unit 70 is capable of variable display and stop display of the first special symbol relating to the first game by the operation mode of eight LED indicator lights G to N arranged in a line in the horizontal direction. It has become. The first special symbol by the first special symbol display portion 70 is a symbol corresponding to the result of the first lottery performed with the game ball entering the first start winning opening 62 as a trigger, and its variation display is predetermined When it is stopped in the hit mode, a big hit occurs and a special game is executed. In the first special symbol display section 70, at the time of the stop display of the first special symbol, the combination of lighting and extinguishing of each LED indicator light G to N allows 256 (= 2 ^ 8) types at maximum. Identification information can be displayed.

  Similarly, with the second special symbol display unit 71 described above, up to 256 (= 2 ^ 8) types of identification information are displayed by the operation mode of eight LED indicator lights Q to X arranged in a line in the horizontal direction. It is possible.

The main control display device 53 having such a configuration is electrically connected to the main substrate 102 described above, as shown in FIG. The various display units in the main control display device 53 are controlled by the main substrate 102. In FIG. 3, among the various display units in the main control display device 53, only the normal symbol display unit 59, the first special symbol display unit 70, and the second special symbol display unit 71 are shown.
<< Function of main control display device >>

  When the gaming ball passes through the above-mentioned operating port (left operating port 68a or right operating port 68b), the normal symbol display section 59 blinks, and the variable display of the normal symbol is executed. Then, when a predetermined fluctuation time (general drawing fluctuation time) elapses after the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is started, the normal symbol is stopped and displayed. And, if the normal symbol is displayed in the form of disengaging (disappearing aspect), if there is a ball entering the subsequent operation opening after the passage of a predetermined stop time (fixed figure stop fixed time), it is normal The next variable display relating to the symbol is started. In addition, when a normal symbol is stopped and displayed in a predetermined hitting mode (hit mode), while shifting to the next variable display as in the case of the removal, the hit of the normal symbol previously stopped is displayed. Depending on the mode, the second start winning opening 63 performs an opening operation for a predetermined time.

  In addition, the first symbol storage indicator LED and the second symbol storage indicator second LED, which are the LED indicators A and B, are one set of two, and the combination of the two LEDs turn off, turn on and blink, Values from 0 to 4 can be displayed.

  The number of reservations pertaining to this common drawing lottery is the number of gaming balls that have passed through the left operation opening 68a (or the right operation opening 68b) during the normal symbol fluctuation, and the common symbol fluctuation display is not yet executed. Indicates the number of lotteries. That is, when the symbol variation performed earlier is not completed, the variation start condition is not satisfied, and when the symbol variation is completed, the variation start condition is satisfied, and the lottery result stored on hold ( A new symbol variation will be started based on the pending lottery result). And, the upper limit of the number of reservations is four, and it is arranged that the number of pending storage is not exceeded four.

  The display of numerical values of 0 to 4 by the first symbol memory display first LED (A) and the normal symbol memory display second LED (B), for example, turns off both when the number of reservations is 0 (no suspension) When the number of reservations is one, it is possible to turn on one and turn off the other. Also, if the number of reservations is 2, both are lit, if the number of reservations is 3, one of them is lit and the other blinks, and if the number of reservations is 4, both are blinked. Can be displayed.

  About the display of the number of reservations of the 1st special symbol by the above-mentioned 1st special symbol display part 70, 1st 1st special symbol memory display 1st LED (O) and 1st 2nd special symbol memory display 2nd LED (P) Is performed by displaying numerical values of 0 to 4 as one set. About the display of the number of reservations for the second special symbol by the second special symbol display unit 71, 1 for the 2nd special symbol memory display 1st LED (Y) and the 2nd special symbol memory 2nd LED (Z) 1 It is performed by displaying the numerical value of 0-4 as a group.

  The first special symbol memory display first LED (O) and the first special symbol memory display second LED (P), or the second special symbol memory display first LED (Y) and the second special symbol memory display second LED The display of the numerical values of 0 to 4 by (Z) is, for example, the display of the number of reservations in the same manner as in the case of the first symbol memory display first LED (A) and the normal symbol memory display second LED (B) described above It is possible to

In the game situation where the above-mentioned right-handed game should be performed, display in a predetermined mode using the right-handed instruction lamp F of the main control display device 53 (see FIG. 6A) is performed. In the present embodiment, the right-handed instruction light F is set to be turned off at the time of left-handed game condition which should be left-handed and to be lighted at the time of right-handed game condition which is right-handed.
<Structure of effect display device and basic display contents>

  Subsequently, a configuration of the above-described effect display device 60 and a basic display example of the effect display device 60 will be described. In the present embodiment, a large (for example, about 15 inches) liquid crystal display is used as the effect display device 60. In the display area 194 of the effect display device 60, effect display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol displayed on the main control display device 53 described above, and other effect display such as story display are performed. Although various images are displayed in the effect display device 60, here, basic effect display directly related to the first special symbol or the second special symbol will be described.

  As described above, when the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is started in the main control display device 53, in the effect display device 60, as shown in FIGS. 7A and 7B, the effect is displayed The fluctuation presentation accompanied by the fluctuation display of the pattern 190 is executed. In the present embodiment, the effect pattern 190 is configured by the left effect pattern 190a, the middle effect pattern 190b, and the right effect pattern 190c. In addition, about the production | presentation pattern 190a-190c of the left middle right below, according to a condition, it may be described as "the production | presentation pattern 190" and "the production | presentation pattern 190a-190c."

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the effect pattern 190 has seven types of element symbols (symbol element effect symbols) having the meanings of the symbols "1" to "7". In addition, the detail of the above-mentioned element pattern is mentioned later. In addition, here, the description will be made using seven types of element designs having the meanings of the symbols “1” to “7” so that the description is not complicated, but as the element design, for example, a predetermined word It is also possible to adopt a symbol having a meaning other than numbers, like. Furthermore, it is also possible to use a combination of one having a meaning of numbers and one having another meaning as an element design. In addition, in order to execute special effects (pseudo continuous notice and special zone effects described later), effects are suggested to appear (displayed by being added to or replaced with a normal pattern) only when there is a certain change A special symbol for the purpose is also included in the rendering symbol 190 in a broad sense.

  With the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol in the main control display device 53, the above-mentioned effect symbol 190 is variably displayed in the effect display device 60 (see FIG. 7A). In the present embodiment, in the variation display of the production symbols, the left production symbols 190a to the right production symbols 190c are individually moved vertically (vertically scrolled) to cause the above-mentioned element symbols to appear sequentially in the display area 194 Is executed by In addition to the vertical direction, various modes such as horizontal direction, rotation, or turning can be adopted as the scroll direction of the effect symbols 190a to 190c, but various modes of scroll display will be described later. Do.

  In addition, the effect pattern 190 may constitute a combination of so-called "reach" as an intermediate stage of the variable display. In this "reach", two of the effect symbols 190 (here, the left effect symbol 190a and the right effect symbol 190c) are, for example, the same number symbols such as "7" and "7", and the same meaning. Alternatively, the combination is configured with symbols having a predetermined relationship. Furthermore, in this "reach", the remaining one symbol (here, the middle effect symbol 190b) other than the effect symbols 190a and 190c that constitute the combination of reach can not constitute a combination with other effect symbols. It has become.

  In addition, although various kinds of "reach" and other various things are employable as a display mode of the production | presentation pattern 190, the detail of various display modes is mentioned later. Further, in the effect display device 60, various effects are performed in addition to the effect by the effect pattern 190, and the details thereof will be described later.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the effect display device 60 uses a liquid crystal display, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, other types of display bodies such as a mechanical drum body and an LED display body are used. It may be one. Furthermore, the effect display device 60 is not limited to one provided with only one display body, and may be configured by a combination of a plurality of display bodies, for example, with the addition of an additional display body.

Furthermore, it is also possible to provide such an additional display as a movable effect member, and to construct a gimmick by the additional display. Then, usually, an additional display body is arranged outside the display area 194 so as not to hinder the visual recognition of the display area 194 of the effect display device 60, and a predetermined effect pattern is executed. In some cases, it is conceivable to cause an additional display to appear in front of the display area 194. In addition, the specific aspect of the presentation using an additional display body is mentioned later.
<Electric configuration of pachinko gaming machine>

  Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 10 of this embodiment will be described. Here, the main ones of the electrical configurations will be extracted and described. First, as shown in FIG. 4, the pachinko gaming machine 10 is provided with a power supply substrate 251, a payout control substrate 103, a main substrate 102, a sub main substrate 301, and the like. Among them, the above-mentioned payout control substrate 103 and the like are connected to the power supply substrate 251, and to the payout control substrate 103, the main substrate 102, the launching device 43, and the game ball connection terminal board (not shown) ) Etc are connected. Further, the main control display device 53 and the sub main substrate 301 described above are connected to the main substrate 102, and the sub sub substrate 302 described above is connected to the sub main substrate 301.

  Among the various configurations described above, the power supply substrate 251 is included in the above-described power supply unit 32 (see FIG. 2). Further, although not shown, a state display unit used to display the type of error, a card unit for performing money processing and ball lending processing relating to ball lending, etc. are also connected to the payout control board 103. . Furthermore, a ball coin operation board etc. used for ball coin operation are connected to the above-mentioned game ball etc. lending device connection terminal board (not shown). Further, the above-described launcher 43 is connected with a touch switch (not shown), a launch stop switch (not shown) and the like provided in the launch handle 20 (see FIG. 1).

  As shown in FIG. 3 on the main board 102 via various game board connection boards (not shown), the main control display device 53, the respective passage detection devices 69a, 69b, the ordinary electric role solenoid 76, the first Start winning detection device 74, second starting winning detection device 75, general winning detection device 73, first large winning detection device 78, second large winning detection device 79, first large winning opening solenoid 80, second large winning opening solenoid 81, and a magnetic sensor, a radio wave sensor (not shown), etc. are connected.

  The sub main board 301 is connected to various devices for effect via various relay boards (not shown). As various devices for effect, various kinds of LED boards for various electric ornaments in the center decoration 64, various movable body motors of the movable effect members 93 and 94, LED boards for electric ornaments in the game machine frame 11, and the game machine frame 11 The frame motor etc. for presentation provided can be illustrated. Here, as the electric decoration in the gaming machine frame 11, other than the above-described one performed by the glass door 15, the one performed by the dish unit 16, the one performed by the button device provided with the operation button 22, etc. can be illustrated. . The frame motor described above is used to drive a movable effect member (not shown) provided in the game machine frame 11.

  As shown in FIG. 4, the sub-sub substrate 302 is connected to the liquid crystal unit 42 provided in the effect display device 60 described above, various speakers 21 and the like. The various speakers 21 may be connected to the sub main board 301 described above.

  Subsequently, configurations of the main substrate 102 and the payout control substrate 103 will be described. As shown in FIG. 4, a CPU (main CPU) 501, a ROM (main ROM) 502, and an RWM 503 are mounted on the main board 102. Among these, as the CPU 501, for example, a central processing unit in a CPU device (CPU device) in which resin packaging is performed can be used. Note that “ROM” and “RWM” described in the present embodiment are a generic concept including both those incorporated in the CPU device and those externally attached to the CPU device.

  Furthermore, although not shown, in the CPU device mounted on the main board 102, in addition to the CPU 501, a control clock generation circuit, a clock generation circuit for random numbers, a random number circuit for 16-bit random numbers, an 8-bit random number Random number circuit etc. are provided. Among these, a random number circuit for 16-bit random numbers and a random number circuit for 8-bit random numbers are for generating hardware random numbers that are built-in random numbers.

  In addition, an input / output port 505 is mounted on the main board 102 to input / output data to / from devices external to the main board 102. Furthermore, although not shown, various circuit parts such as an interrupt circuit and a timer circuit are formed on the main substrate 102.

  The above-described ROM 502 stores a game program for the CPU 501 to perform processing related to a game, predetermined control data, and the like. Further, the RWM 503 described above rewritably stores data necessary for various types of processing, data generated during processing, and the like when the CPU 501 executes a game program.

  Subsequently, on the payout control board 103, a CPU (payout CPU) 511, a ROM (payout ROM) 512, and an RWM 513 are mounted. Among these, as the CPU 511, for example, a central processing unit in a CPU device (CPU device) in which resin packaging is performed can be used. The ROM 512 also stores a payout program for the CPU 511 to perform processing relating to payout, predetermined control data, and the like. Further, the RWM 513 described above rewritably stores data necessary for various types of processing, data generated during processing, and the like when the CPU 501 executes the payout program.

  The sub main board 301 described above includes a CPU (sub main CPU) 521, a ROM (sub main ROM) 522, a work RWM 523, an input port 527, an output port 528, a bus line (not shown) and the like. . The output side of the main board 102 is connected to the input side of the input port 527, and the CPU 521, the ROM 522, the work RWM 523, the output port 528, etc. are connected to the output side of the input port 527.

  The CPU 521 of the sub main substrate 301 controls the display of the effect display device 60 based on the effect control command (command) for symbol display transmitted from the main substrate 102. The ROM 522 is a memory for storing various control programs executed by the CPU 521 and fixed value data, and the work RWM 523 temporarily stores work data and flags used when the CPU 521 executes various programs. Memory.

  The transmission and reception of data between the main substrate 102 and the sub main substrate 301 described above is performed in a one-way communication (one-way communication) from the main substrate 102 to the sub main substrate 301. Therefore, the information held by the main board 102 can not be referred to by the sub main board 301 unless the main board 102 transmits the information to the sub main board 301.

  The sub-sub substrate 302 described above includes a CPU 531, a work RWM 532, a program ROM 533, a sound ROM 534, a character ROM 535, an image controller (VDP) 536, a sound control circuit 537, an input port 538, an output port 539, and a bus line (not shown). Is equipped. Furthermore, the image controller (VDP) 536 comprises a video memory 540. The output side of the sub main board 301 is connected to the input side of the input port 538, and the devices such as the CPU 531, the work RWM 532 and the program ROM 533 are connected to the output side of the input port 538.

The video memory 540 described above is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the effect display device 60, and the display content (frame image of the effect display device 60 can be displayed by rewriting the contents of the image data in the video memory 540). ) Is changed. The character ROM 535 is a memory for storing character data such as a symbol displayed on the effect display device 60. The image controller 536 adjusts the operation timings of the CPU 531, the video memory 540, and the output port 539 to intervene in reading and writing data, and reads the display data stored in the video memory 540 from the character ROM 535 at a predetermined timing. Furthermore, the symbols are superimposed in the order of the layers for which the priority is determined in advance and displayed on the effect display device 60.
<Power supply and data backup>

  The aforementioned power supply substrate 251 includes a power supply unit 541 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko gaming machine 10, and an initialization switch circuit unit 543 having an initialization switch 544. The power supply unit 541 supplies a predetermined amount of voltage for driving various switches, motors, logic circuits, and the like to the main substrate 102, the payout control substrate 103, and the like through a power supply path (not shown). 103 and other predetermined devices.

  The initialization switch circuit unit 543 includes a circuit that outputs an initialization signal for clearing backup data to the main substrate 102 and the payout control substrate 103 when the initialization switch 544 is pressed when the power is turned on. .

  As described above, the RWM 503 in the main board 102 is supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply board 251 even after the power of the pachinko gaming machine 10 is shut off, and data can be held (back up). That is, in the RWM 503, a backup area 503a is provided in addition to a memory and an area (not shown) for temporarily storing various data and the like. The backup area 503a is a stack pointer at the time of power shutoff when the power is shut off (when a power interruption occurs) or the like due to the occurrence of a power failure (including a so-called momentary power interruption due to a momentary voltage drop). , Each register, and an area for storing values such as I / O. Then, with the normal power supply startup and the elimination of the power failure, the state of the main board 102 and the like is returned to the state before the power supply cutoff based on the information of the backup area 503a.

  In addition, as for RWM 513 in payout control board 103, as in RWM 503 of main board 102, a backup voltage is supplied from power supply board 251 after powering off pachinko gaming machine 10 so that data can be held (backup). It has become.

  The above-described main board 102 is provided with a power failure monitoring circuit unit 506 that monitors power supply interruption due to a power failure as described above. The power failure monitoring circuit unit 506 monitors the voltage of DC stability (for example, 30 volts) which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 541 of the power supply substrate 251, and when this voltage becomes less than a predetermined voltage Detects the occurrence of interruption) and outputs the above-mentioned power interruption signal. The CPU 501 of the main board 102 and the CPU 511 of the payout control board 103 execute predetermined power-off process based on the input of the power-off signal.

  Next, basic functions of the main board 102 will be described. The main substrate 102 of the present embodiment performs various functions such as, for example, entry judgment, lottery, and command transmission, by the operation of each of the above-described configurations (see FIG. 4).

  In FIG. 5, representative functional means in each of the main substrate 102, the sub main substrate 301, and the sub sub substrate 302 are shown. Among these, the main board 102 is the ball entry determination means 110, the first lottery means 111, the second lottery means 112, the common drawing lottery means 113, the hold control means 114, the main display control means 115, the special game control means 116, Specific game control means 117, opening and closing control means 118, advance information notification means 119, main command transmission means 120 and the like are provided. Then, the main board 102 is a lottery concerning a special symbol, a lottery concerning a normal symbol, a hold control, a main control display, a special game, a specific game, an opening / closing control, prior information by these functional means as will be described in order below. Execute notification etc.

The above-mentioned ball entry judging means 110, from the sensors and the like provided in each winning opening, the entry of the game ball to each winning opening (each operation opening, various starting winning openings, various big winning openings, general winning openings, etc.) It makes a decision based on the output signal.
<< Looze function to affect special symbol >>

  The aforementioned first lottery means 111 executes the first lottery based on the entry into the first start winning opening 62. The first lottery means 111 has functions of a first lottery value acquisition means 121, a first success / failure determination means 122, a first symbol determination means 123, and a first pattern determination means 124. The result of the first lottery is represented by the first special symbol stopped and displayed in the first special symbol display portion 70 of the above-mentioned main control display device 53 (see FIG. 6A).

  Similarly, the aforementioned second lottery means 112 executes the second lottery based on the entry of the ball into the second starting winning opening 63. The second lottery means 112 has the functions of a second lottery value acquisition means 125, a second success / failure judgment means 126, a second symbol determination means 127, and a second pattern determination means 128. The result of the second lottery is represented by the second special symbol stopped and displayed in the second special symbol display portion 71 of the main control display device 53 described above.

  The first lottery value acquisition means 121 provided in the first lottery means 111 mentioned above takes the value of the jackpot random number according to the first lottery, triggered by the entry of the ball into the first start winning opening 62, as the first hit lottery value. Get as. In addition, the second lottery value acquisition means 125 provided in the above-mentioned second lottery means 112 takes the value of the jackpot random number according to the second lottery as the second success or failure in response to entering the second start winning opening 63. Acquire as a lottery value.

  In the present embodiment, the big hit random number acquired as the first hit / lottery value and the big hit random number obtained as the second hit / lottery value are hardware random numbers (hard random numbers) and software random numbers (soft random numbers). It is generated by the operation (addition) used. As a hardware random number, for example, a built-in random number generated by a 16-bit random number circuit is used, and as a software random number, a value updated every interruption by a random number generation program in software is used. Note that either one of hardware random numbers and software random numbers may be used.

  The first success or failure judging means 122 in the first lottery means 111 makes a success or failure judgment based on the first success or failure lottery value, and whether or not the first success or failure lottery value falls under a predetermined value (hit value) To judge. Similarly, the second success or failure judging means 126 in the second lottery means 112 makes a success or failure judgment based on the above-mentioned second success or failure lottery value, and the second success or failure lottery value becomes a predetermined value (hit value) which is a hit. Determine if applicable. In the determination by the first determination unit 122 and the second determination unit 126, the correspondence table between the first and second lottery values and the second lottery value and the lottery result of the big hit lottery (FIG. 8 (a ) Is used. Here, as shown in FIG. 8A, the normal time variation when big hit refers to a random number range that is always a big hit, and the positive variation when big hit is a random number range where a big hit is only when certain variation It is shown that.

  The first symbol determination means 123 in the first lottery means 111 and the second symbol determination means 127 in the second lottery means 112 are won when any of the big wins in the big hit lottery pertaining to the first special symbol or the second special symbol The type of special symbol is determined based on the jackpot symbol determination table (see FIG. 9). The jackpot symbol determination table for the first lottery defines the relationship between the symbol lottery value, which is a random number (symbol random number) related to symbol determination, and the type of the special symbol.

  Here, the symbol lottery value may be also referred to as "symbol random number per special symbol", "symbol random number" or the like related to a special symbol. Further, in the present embodiment, small hit is included in the type of the hit, and the first symbol determining means 123 and the second symbol determining means 127 are special when the small hit is won in the big hit lottery relating to the special symbol. The type of symbol is determined based on the small hit symbol determination table (see FIG. 9C).

  The symbol lottery value is acquired, triggered by the entrance to the starting winning opening, as in the case of the above-mentioned winning or not lottery value. In addition, the type of special symbol is associated with the type of hit, and is linked to the acquired symbol lottery value to determine the type of big hit and the presence or absence of a small hit.

  The first pattern determination means 124 in the first lottery means 111 and the second pattern determination means 128 in the second lottery means 112 are based on the special pattern fluctuation pattern table for the variation pattern of the special symbol in the special symbol display unit corresponding to each. decide. The special figure fluctuation pattern table defines the relationship between a number of special figure fluctuation patterns and a pattern lottery value which is a random number value (variation pattern random number) related to the fluctuation pattern determination of the special symbol.

  The pattern lottery value is acquired, triggered by the entrance to the starting winning opening, as in the case of the above-mentioned success or failure lottery value. Furthermore, the fluctuation pattern according to the first special symbol and the second special symbol is, for example, according to various gaming situations such as big hit, off time, reach, presence or absence, number of reservations, number of changes after big hit, etc. A plurality of different special figure fluctuation pattern tables are provided.

  The fluctuation pattern (special pattern fluctuation pattern) according to the special symbol defines the time (variation time) from the start of fluctuation to the stop in the fluctuation display of the special symbol. The special pattern fluctuation pattern defines various long and short fluctuation times, such as one second or less to several tens of seconds, depending on the type. That is, the fluctuation time is determined as the termination condition of the fluctuation display in each special figure fluctuation pattern, and the above-mentioned first special symbol display unit 70 or the second special symbol display unit 71 (see FIG. 6A). Is the start of the variation display of the special symbol, and when the specified variation time has elapsed, the special symbol is stopped and displayed.

  For most of the special figure fluctuation patterns to be selected at short time, the fluctuation time is set shorter than the special figure fluctuation pattern to be selected at short time. However, the special pattern fluctuation patterns that can be selected when the number of reservations is 4 at a non-short time include those with a short fluctuation time as compared to a specific special pattern fluctuation pattern at the time of time reduction. There is.

Further, in the present embodiment, the fluctuation pattern selected in a predetermined situation such as the time of probability change is such that the one with extremely short fluctuation time (for example, about 0.6 seconds) occupies most. And in such a situation, based on the change pattern of a very short time, the change display of a special symbol and the rendition accompanying this are performed. In addition, the effects based on the fluctuation pattern of such a very short fluctuation time will be described later.
<< Various lottery functions pertaining to ordinary symbols >>

  Subsequently, the above-mentioned common drawing lottery means 113 will be described. The common drawing lottery means 113 includes a common drawing lottery value acquiring means 129, a common drawing equivalence determination means 130, a common drawing symbol determining means 131, and a common drawing pattern determining means 132. And, when the passage determination of the game ball in each operation opening 68a, 68b is detected by the above-mentioned ball entry judgment means 110, the common drawing lottery means 113 is based on this detection result, the drawing which relates to the normal design (commonly drawing lottery To do).

  In this common drawing lottery, the common drawing lottery value acquiring means 129 acquires a common drawing lottery value which is a random number (general drawing symbol random number) related to the ordinary symbol, and the common drawing symbol determining means 131 Referenced. In this common drawing determination table, the correspondence between the common drawing lottery value and the type of the normal symbol is defined. Then, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol linked to the common drawing lottery value is the one corresponding to the hit by the common drawing hit / nonconforming judging means 130, and if it corresponds to the hit, the kind of the hit is judged. Be done.

  In addition, a common drawing pattern lottery value is acquired triggered by entering the ball into the left operation opening 68a or the right operation opening 68b, and the common drawing pattern determination means 132 uses the acquired common drawing pattern lottery value to change the normal symbol. A pattern (common figure fluctuation pattern) is determined. Each common drawing fluctuation pattern corresponds to a common drawing pattern lottery value which is a random number (common drawing fluctuation pattern random number) according to the common drawing fluctuation pattern, and is linked to the acquired common drawing pattern lottery value, and the game situation It is decided that the common drawing fluctuation pattern according to is decided.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the common drawing lottery value which is a random number related to a normal symbol and the common drawing pattern lottery value are created using only software random numbers.
<< Functions related to holding special symbols >>

  Subsequently, the above-mentioned hold control means 114 will be described. The hold control means 114 has a first hold means 133, a second hold means 134, and a common view hold means 135. Among these, when there is a new entry to the first starting winning opening 62, the first holding means 133 is acquired by entering the ball if the predetermined change start condition relating to the first special symbol is not satisfied. The information (first special map hold storage information) relating to various random numbers (first success or failure lottery value, first symbol lottery value, etc.) is temporarily held and stored. In the present embodiment, the upper limit value of the suspension relating to the first special symbol is set to four, and within the range not exceeding the upper limit value, the suspension relating to the first special symbol is possible.

  The variation display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol executed when there is the above-mentioned ball entry is finished, and furthermore, the first special symbol or the second special symbol generated before the above-mentioned ball entry In the case where there is no suspension pertaining to the above, the variation start condition pertaining to the first special symbol is established, and a new symbol variation pertaining to the first special symbol is permitted.

  Also about the above-mentioned second stocking means 134, when there is a new entry to the second starting winning opening 63, if the predetermined fluctuation start condition concerning the second special symbol is not satisfied, it is acquired by entering the ball Information relating to various random numbers (second success or failure lottery value, second symbol lottery value, etc.) is temporarily stored on hold.

  When the variation display of the second special symbol which has been executed when there is the above-mentioned ball entry is finished, the variation start condition concerning the second special symbol is satisfied, and the new symbol variation concerning the second special symbol Will be permitted. In addition, in the present embodiment, the upper limit value of the hold related to the second special symbol is set to four similarly to the first special symbol.

The first special symbol and the second special symbol described above determine the variation start condition after the special game is ended when the symbol to start the special game is stopped and the special game is controlled.
<< The function regarding the reservation of the normal pattern >>

  Subsequently, the above-mentioned common view holding means 135 will be described. The regular drawing holding means 135, when entering the ball in the operation openings 68a, 68b (see FIG. 1), if the predetermined fluctuation start condition for the normal symbol is not satisfied, the random number obtained by entering the ball (common The information (general drawing reserve storage information) related to the figure lottery value etc. is temporarily stored on hold. And until the fluctuation start condition is satisfied, the fluctuation display of the normal symbol concerning the above-mentioned ball entry is not permitted. In the present embodiment, the upper limit value of the suspension related to the normal symbol is set to four, and within the range not exceeding the upper limit value, the suspension related to the normal symbol is possible.

The fluctuation display of the normal symbol which has been executed when there is the above-mentioned ball entry is finished, when the ordinary electric part does not operate, the fluctuation start condition which relates to the normal symbol is satisfied, the new which relates to the normal symbol Pattern variations will be permitted.
<< Function related to main control display >>

  Subsequently, the main display control unit 115 described above will be described. The main display control means 115 includes a first special view control means 136, a second special view control means 137, a common view control means 138, a hold display control means 139, and other display control means 140. Among these, the first special figure control means 136 follows the variation pattern of the first special symbol determined by the first lottery means 111, and the first special symbol display unit 70 (see FIG. 6A) The variable display of the symbol (for example, the blinking display that blinks the LED indicator lights M and N every 100 msec) is performed. The first special symbol is stopped and displayed with the determined symbol in the first special symbol display unit 70 when the variation time determined by the variation pattern has elapsed.

  Furthermore, if the variation start condition relating to the second special symbol mentioned above is satisfied, the second special figure control means 137 follows the variation pattern determined by the second lottery means 112, the second special symbol display portion 71 ( As shown in FIG. 6A, the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner. Then, the second special symbol is stopped and displayed by the determined symbol in the second special symbol display unit 71 when the variation time determined by the variation pattern has elapsed.

  Further, if the fluctuation start condition relating to the above-mentioned normal symbol is satisfied, the common drawing control means 138 follows the fluctuation pattern of the normal symbol determined by the common drawing lottery means 113, the normal symbol display portion 59 (FIG. In a))), the variation display of the normal symbol is performed. Furthermore, the normal symbol is stopped and displayed with the determined symbol in the normal symbol display section 59 when the variation time determined by the variation pattern has elapsed.

Furthermore, the suspension display control means 139 displays the above-mentioned first special symbol, the second special symbol, and the number of reservations related to the ordinary symbol. And the display of these pending numbers is the first special symbol memory display (LED indicator lights O and P) and the second special symbol memory display (LED display of the main control display device 53 shown in FIG. 6 (a). It is performed by the lights Y and Z) and the normal symbol storage display unit (LED indicator lights C and D). Further, the above-mentioned other display control means 140 controls the display on the main control display device 53 other than the above-mentioned first special symbol, second special symbol, normal symbol, and various hold display.
<< Features related to special games >>

Next, the above-mentioned special game control means 116 will be described. The special game control means 116 determines that the special game operation condition is established when the special symbol is stopped in a predetermined big hit mode when hitting the big hit, and the predetermined game according to the type of the big hit as described above. A special game is executed in which the game is opened in a mode (a predetermined number of unit games or an opening pattern of a big winning opening in a unit game).
<< Features related to specific games >>

  Subsequently, the above-mentioned specific game control means 117 will be described. The specific game control means 117 performs control relating to the above-mentioned probability change, time reduction, and the like. The specific game control means 117 shifts the gaming state after the end of the special game to a probability changing state, a time saving state or the like according to the type of the big hit. The definite change condition is attached to some types of jackpots, not all types of jackpots. Furthermore, for some jackpots, the definite change state continues until the next big hit, and for the other big hits with positive change, it is continued until the total number of display changes after the special game reaches a predetermined number (for example, 100 times) . During the definite change state, the winning probability of the big hit by the first lottery means 111 and the second lottery means 112 is maintained at a value higher than that of the normal time which is the non-deterministic change time.

  In addition, the time saving state is continued until the sum of the variable display counts of the first special symbol and the second special symbol reaches a predetermined termination condition count (for example, 100 times) counting from the end of the special game. Furthermore, the first pattern determination means 124 and the second pattern determination means 128 have a variation pattern for time reduction so that the variation display time of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is generally shorter than that in the normal state during time saving. Choose

Furthermore, as described above, the ball entry facilitation game is executed according to when the time saving is executed as the specific game, and the operation of the ordinary electric role becomes easy, and is disposed at the entrance of the second start winning opening Opening and closing blades are easy to open. The opening and closing control of the opening and closing blade is controlled by an opening and closing control unit 118 described later.
<< Function related to opening / closing control >>

Subsequently, the above-mentioned opening / closing control means 118 will be described. The opening / closing control means 118 controls the opening / closing operation of the ordinary electric winning combination (opening / closing blade) of the second start winning opening 63, the first large winning opening 91, and the second large winning opening 92. When the normal symbol is stopped in a specific manner, the opening / closing control means 118 sends an opening instruction to the normal motorized combination solenoid 76 to open the normally arranged electric combination of the second start winning opening 63. Further, the open / close control means 118 controls to send an opening instruction to the first large winning opening solenoid 80 or the second large winning opening solenoid 81 in the special game, and the first large winning opening 91 or the second large winning opening Open 92.
<< Function about prior information notification >>

  Then, the above-mentioned prior information notification means 119 is demonstrated. The prior information notification means 119 is acquired regardless of whether or not the symbol variation display corresponding to the entering ball is suspended when the first starting winning opening 62 or the second starting winning opening 63 has entered the ball. A process for transmitting information related to various random number values to the sub substrate (herein, the sub main substrate 301) as prior notification information is performed.

  As the above-mentioned prior notification information, the above-mentioned each winning lottery value (the first winning lottery value or the second winning lottery value), each symbol lottery value (the first symbol lottery value or the second symbol lottery value), each pattern It is possible to illustrate information such as what win / fail range, symbol range, and pattern range the lottery value (first pattern lottery value or second pattern lottery value) belongs to.

Note that transmission of such advance notification information enables various pre-reading effects on the side of the sub substrate 104. And, as the pre-reading effect, it is possible to illustrate pending announcement and consecutive announcement etc, but these details it mentions later.
<< Function related to command transmission >>

Subsequently, the above-mentioned main command transmission means 120 will be described. The main command transmission unit 120 transmits a command (main command) from the main board 102 to the sub main board 301. Command transmission from the main board 102 to the sub main board 301 is performed including various information at various timings such as start winning, special symbol variation start, special symbol variation stop, big hit occurrence, etc. .
<Basic function of sub board>

  Next, basic functions of the sub substrate 104 described above will be described. In the present embodiment, the sub substrate 104 is composed of the sub main substrate 301 and the sub sub substrate 302, and performs various functions such as command reception from the main substrate 102, determination of a presentation pattern, presentation control, presentation execution, and the like.

  As shown in FIG. 5, the sub main board 301 has main command receiving means 141, effect pattern determining means 142, sub main command transmitting means 143 and the like. Further, the sub main board 301 is provided with functional means such as a sound control means 144 for controlling a speaker output and the like, and a light control means 145 for controlling a game effect lamp output and the like.

  The effect pattern determined by the effect pattern determining means 142 includes information to specify the display effect displayed on the effect display device 60 and the sound effect and the light effect to be performed together with the display effect as required, During the variable display of the pattern 190, an effect is suggested that indicates the level of the expectation of the big hit. Here, the "expected degree" in the present embodiment can be paraphrased as "reliable degree". As for “expected degree” below, those describing the stage (normal pattern, chance-up pattern, finalized pattern) to enhance the sense of becoming a big hit due to fluctuation when appearing among the patterns of the same type of advance presentation, or 1 production The probability of the hit fluctuation pattern being included in the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the effect of 1 when confirmed with the hit fluctuation pattern (fluctuation pattern in hit fluctuation) information and out-of-out fluctuation pattern information (fluctuation pattern in out-shift fluctuation) generating There is a case where it may be used for each description of what is stated, and generally, "representation with high degree of expectation" refers to the rendition which often makes a big hit when the rendition concerned occurs.

  When the effect pattern is determined by the effect pattern determining means 142, effect pattern information indicating the determined effect pattern is transmitted to the sub sub board 302 as a sub main command via the sub main command transmitting means 143. Further, the command transmitted from the sub main substrate 301 to the sub sub substrate 302 also includes sound information and the like in order to read out sound data, lamp data and the like from the ROM of the sub sub substrate.

As shown in FIG. 5, the sub-sub board 302 is provided with sub main command receiving means 146, effect execution control means 147, and the like. Then, in the sub-sub substrate 302, based on the sub main command from the sub main substrate 301, the effect execution control means 147 sequentially outputs necessary image data to the liquid crystal unit 42 (see FIG. 4) to construct an animation image. The effect display device 60 displays a moving image for effect.
<Specific example of a specific game>

Next, the specific aspect of the specific game mentioned above is demonstrated. As described above, as a special game, the probability fluctuation function of the special symbol (probable variation), the fluctuation time shortening function of the special symbol (time reduction), and the ball entry facilitation game (the probability fluctuation function of the ordinary symbol, the fluctuation time of the ordinary symbol is shortened Function, a combination of the open extension function of the ordinary motorized part) is provided. And, at least one of these various specific games is executed according to the result of the big hit lottery (the stop display symbol of the special symbol) and the game result during the big hit. In the present embodiment, not a so-called ST machine described above, but a specification in which a definite variation period lasts until the next big hit is adopted in part of the big hit, but a specific aspect will be described later.
<< probability fluctuation game >>

  The above-mentioned definite change is to change the probability state of the game relating to the special symbol after the big hit so that the occurrence probability of the big hit becomes higher than the normal probability state. In the pachinko gaming machine adopting the ST, the duration (the probability variation period) of the definite variation state is determined based on the number of times of variation of the special symbol.

The number of times of variation of the special symbol is determined as one from the variation display of the special symbol to the stop indication. And, in the fixed variation period in ST, the total number of fluctuation of the first special symbol and the second special symbol after the end of the special game is set to a predetermined number (for example, 100 times). A function that allows the definite variation period to end before the occurrence of the next big hit can be referred to as ST, count variation, or the like.
<< fluctuation time shortening game >>

  The above-described time reduction substantially shortens the variation time of the special symbol (first special symbol and second special symbol) in the main control display device 53 described above, as compared to the normal game. Here, "generally shorten" is not always shorter than the normal game in all cases, and in some cases, when the variation time of the special symbol is equal to the normal game or longer than the normal game Is meant to be included. And, according to this time, since the variation time of the special symbol becomes short, even if the winning of the start winning opening (the first starting winning opening 62 and the second starting winning opening 63) occurs continuously, it is special It is possible to smoothly advance the variable display and the stop display of the symbol at short intervals, and it is possible to secure many opportunities for a big hit lottery.

  Furthermore, the duration (short period) of the time saving state is determined based on the number of times the special symbol changes as well as the probability changing state. And in this embodiment, the time saving state is continued until the total number of times of fluctuation of the first special symbol and the second special symbol after the end of the special game reaches a predetermined number (for example, 100 times).

  In the example described above, the definite variation period and the short duration are set to the same period, but the positive variation period and the short duration may be different from each other. For example, it is possible to set the definite variation period to 104 times and set the short time period to 100 times. Also, the definite variation period and the short time period are not limited to being constant. For example, the probability variation period can be set to any of four times, 25 times, 100 times, etc., depending on the type of the big hit that occurred. Also, depending on the type of jackpot that occurred, it is possible to set the time period to any of 25 times, 50 times, 75 times, 100 times, etc.

  In addition, it is possible to have a so-called fall lottery function. As this fall lottery, the following can be illustrated. For example, after a definite change or time reduction reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times) smaller than the above-mentioned maximum number of changes (100 times in this case), for each change of special symbol every time until the maximum number of changes is reached A lottery (specific game end lottery) whether or not to end the definite change or the time reduction is executed. When the player wins this specific game end lottery, the definite change and the time reduction are ended, and the gaming state from the next change returns to the normal state not accompanied by the definite change or the time reduction.

Furthermore, it is possible to execute only one or the other in the specific game as well as performing both the definite variation and the time reduction. For example, depending on the type of jackpot hit, it is possible to give only a short time and not give a definite change, or to give only a positive change without giving a short time.
<< Ease of entry game

  Then, the above-mentioned ball entry facilitation game is demonstrated. This ball entry facilitation game is a gaming state in which the function related to the ordinary electric role is set to the player in an advantageous manner, and the opening mode of the second start winning opening 63 can be more easily accepted than the game ball. is there. When the ball entry facilitation game is executed, the second time by the control pattern such as the time variation relating to the normal symbol, the probability fluctuation relating to the normal symbol, the opening extension relating to the ordinary electric role, or the combination of these control modes. The ease of entering the start winning hole 63 is enhanced, and the easy entry state is formed.

  Of the various control modes described above for the normal symbol, the time symbol pertaining to the normal symbol is a control aspect in which the variation time of the normal symbol is shortened compared to the normal state, and the probability variation pertaining to the normal symbol is the winning probability of the normal symbol Is a control mode (probable variation related to a normal design) that improves Furthermore, in the control mode, the opening extension pertaining to the normal motorized combination is such that the opening time of the second start winning opening 63 is opened longer (long opening) than the opening (short opening) at normal times (during non-specified game). is there.

  As described above, the entry facilitation game during the specific game is entered into the second start winning opening 63 using the three functions of time reduction of the regular symbol, probability fluctuation of the open lottery, and opening extension of the ordinary electric character. Increase the ease of the ball. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and one or two of these three functions may be used to enhance the ease of entering the second start winning opening 63. Further, the configuration may be such that switching between a period for performing at least one of the three functions and a period for not performing the function is performed according to the gaming state.

The duration of such an entry facilitation game can be determined based on the short time associated with the special symbol. For example, it is possible to adopt a control mode in which the ease of entering the game is continued during the short time according to the special symbol, and the ease of entering the game is ended when the time reduction according to the special symbol is finished. And in this case, the variation pattern of the normal symbol (common figure variation pattern) where the symbol variation is started after the time saving of the special symbol is finished is provided for the normal time (during non-specified game) It is possible to determine from among the variation patterns.
<Major effects in pachinko machines>
<< Basic display form of production design >>

  Next, the main effects of various effects performed by the sub main substrate 301 and the sub sub substrate 302 based on a command from the main substrate 102 to the sub main substrate 301 will be described. And here, first, the basic display mode of the above-mentioned effect pattern 190 (refer to Drawing 7 (a) and (b)) is explained.

  The effect pattern 190 is variably displayed on the effect display device 60 as the special symbol is variably displayed on the main control display device 53 (see FIG. 7A). Furthermore, in response to the special symbol being stopped and displayed on the main control display device 53, the effect symbol 190 is displayed on the effect display device 60 in a stopped state (see FIG. 7B).

  The stop symbol displayed along with the stop of the effect pattern 190 is configured by a combination of three symbols of the left effect pattern 190a, the middle effect pattern 190b, and the right effect pattern 190c. And, when the result of the big hit drawing in the main baseplate 102 becomes the big hit, for example “the combination of the even pattern where 3 symbols are equal, such as“ 777 ”and“ 555 ”, as a stop symbol representing the big hit Is displayed. Also, if the result of the big hit lottery is a loss, for example "767", "928", "331" etc., one part or all of the rendering symbols are in different combinations from other rendering symbols, effects The symbol 190 is stopped and displayed.

  Here, "stop symbol" or "stop of symbol" in the present embodiment means that the three effect symbols 190 are "fixed stop". That is, even if the three effect designs 190a to 190c are displayed in the display area 194 of the effect display device 60 while keeping the combination of, for example, "767" or "928", they are only "confirmed stop". It does not correspond to what was done. Then, it is possible to call a state in which the effect design 190 has not reached the "fixed stop" while keeping the combination in this way as the "temporary stop" state.

  As a display mode of such "temporary stop", for example, a state in which the effect pattern 190 vibrates (shakes) little by little can be illustrated. And it is possible to call the mode of "temporary fluctuation etc." etc. the mode of temporary stop which is swaying little by little with the production | presentation pattern 190 maintaining a combination. As a swing mode of the effect pattern 190 in this "temporary stop", vertical or horizontal linear movement, horizontal rotational movement, etc. can be exemplified, and a movement range of about several millimeters can be exemplified.

  Moreover, as a display mode of the above-mentioned "decision stop", the state which stopped all the production | presentation patterns 190a-190c maintaining the combination can be illustrated through the state of temporary stop. Furthermore, at the time of the “determination stop”, it is possible to perform an effect indicating that the determination stop has been performed. And as an effect indicating that the finalized display is performed, the state of the finalized stop is maintained for a predetermined time (for example, about 1 second), or the special effect is added to each of the finalized design symbols 190a to 190c. It is possible to illustrate displaying (design effect) with.

  Here, as a symbol effect, the effect points 190a to 190c are flashed only momentarily (for example, about 0.5 seconds), or the bright spots are circulated one or more times around each effect pattern 190a to 190c. It is possible to adopt various modes such as enlarging or reducing the symbols 190a to 190c, moving the rendering symbols 190a to 190c by several millimeters, and returning them to their original positions.

  Moreover, in the display mode of above-mentioned "reach", the production | presentation design which kept the combination of reach may be displayed in the mode of above-mentioned "temporary stop." Then, after the reach display by this “temporary stop”, the symbol (in this case, the middle effect pattern 190b) that has been variably displayed forms a combination of disjoints (a combination of distracted reach) and “temporarily stops” and combines the combinations It is possible to illustrate an effect that "fixed stop" is performed while the variable display is ended while being maintained. In addition, from the state where 3 production design 190a-190c has done the “temporary stop” with the combination of the off reach, medium production design 190b resumes fluctuation, the one where reach production is high reliability (reliability concerning big hit) An effect (latter half reach) of developing to a relatively high degree) can also be exemplified.

  In addition, as a mode of scroll display of the production | presentation pattern 190, it is not limited to the above-mentioned vertical scroll, It is possible to employ | adopt various display modes. Then, as another display mode, for example, the horizontal scroll mode in the horizontal direction (right to left etc.) or the rotation of the left effect pattern 190a to the right effect pattern 190c individually around the vertical axis (rotation) It is possible to illustrate a rotation mode in which variable display is performed. Also, for example, while the left effect pattern 190a to the right effect pattern 190c are enlarged along the straight track or the curved (turning) track from the rear to the front, that is, from the back of the screen to the front in the display area 194. It is also possible to illustrate a display mode in which the sheets are sequentially fed out. Furthermore, it is also possible to adopt a scroll display mode in which the effect pattern going from the rear to the front comes down from the top to the front.

  Further, the mode of scrolling is not limited to adopting any one of the various modes as described above, and for example, when a predetermined effect is executed, the predetermined scroll mode is switched to another scroll mode Things are also possible. In addition, it is also possible to make the scroll mode different for each of the effect modes in a plurality of effect modes.

  Moreover, in FIG. 7A and 7B, the display mode by which the combination of the production | presentation pattern 190 is stopped and displayed only in the middle of the up-down direction of the display area 194 is illustrated, and an effective line is a horizontal direction. It is only one line. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the number of effective lines may be two lines or five lines.

Furthermore, in FIG.7 (b), although the left production | presentation pattern 190a is simplified and shown only by the number of a predetermined | prescribed character, the production | presentation pattern 190 means predetermined | prescribed symbols, such as a number, from the left production | presentation pattern 190a. It is possible to constitute by a combination of a part (an element symbol which is the above-mentioned symbol element effect symbol) and a part which is a pattern representing other than a predetermined symbol (an element symbol which is a non symbol element effect symbol). And as a part which consists of a pattern showing other than a predetermined symbol, various design drawings, person's drawings, and these combination etc. can be illustrated, and furthermore, various design drawings and person's drawings combined with a symbol, animation It is also possible.
<< Example of production pattern >>

  Subsequently, the above-described effect pattern will be described. A large number of effect patterns are provided in a state associated with the fluctuation pattern determined by the main substrate 102. Furthermore, in the effect pattern, an aspect of the effect including the effect pattern 190 is defined. More specifically, in the effect pattern, an effect process such as a change process from the start of fluctuation to the stop of fluctuation for the selected effect pattern 190, a background to be displayed in combination with the effect pattern 190, and story development is defined. There is. And, as the rendering pattern, there are those corresponding to the above-mentioned "with reach" and "without reach".

  Among these, when the effect pattern of “with reach” is executed, reach effect of becoming a big hit is performed in the effect display device 60 if one more effect pattern (here, the inside effect pattern 190b) is aligned. Then, when the result of the lottery for the special symbol is a big hit, the display of the odd-numbered “777” or “333” according to the type of the big hit is performed by the effect pattern 190 which has been decidedly stopped. In addition, when the result of the acceptance lottery concerning the special symbol is a loss, for example, a combination indicating a loss such as “767” or “515” is performed by the effect symbol 190 which has been fixedly stopped.

  Furthermore, when the effect pattern of "no reach" is executed, a combination of no reach where the left effect design 190a and the right effect design 190c do not become a reach combination, such as "928" or "331", for example, It is performed by the effect pattern 190 which has been fixedly stopped.

Some of these presentation patterns have long and short variation times, and in particular, the "reach" variation patterns include variations that last for several minutes. In the present embodiment, “no reach (about 3 seconds to 10 seconds)” and “normal reach (10 seconds to 20 seconds) in the fluctuation pattern (see FIGS. 10A to 10C) according to the special symbol described above. "No reach" production pattern, normal reach production pattern, super reach production pattern corresponding to "degree", "super reach (reach with big hit reliability) (about 30 seconds to 2 minutes)" are provided. Then, with these effect patterns, for example, a plurality of effect patterns are associated with one variation pattern, and the number of effect patterns is more diverse than the above-described variation patterns. Furthermore, "super reach" can be paraphrased as "SP (special) reach".
<< Hold effect display concerning special symbol >>

  Next, the on-hold display (on-hold effect display) according to the special symbol performed in the effect display device 60 will be described. In the lower part of the display area 194 of the effect display device 60, as shown in FIGS. 7 (a) and 7 (b), a first number-of-helds display portion 196 showing the number of pending lottery values in the first game; A second number-of-holds display portion 197 indicating the number of pending lottery values in the 2 games is displayed. Here, in order to simplify the description and the illustration, each holding display is represented by a perfect circle, but the holding display may be performed by a combination of other shapes and colors, a character image, an animation, and the like.

  In the present embodiment, when the hold related to the first game occurs, a predetermined hold display is performed on the above-described first number-of-holds display portion 196. Furthermore, as the number of pending increases, a pending indication is added. Then, when the number of pending has reached the upper limit, as shown in FIG. 7A, the first pending number display unit 196 performs four pending displays.

  Further, the hold display in the first hold number display unit 196 can be performed from the first display position to the fourth display position. That is, the first hold number display unit 196 includes the first display position to the fourth display position, and the portion on the right end of the first hold number display unit 196 viewed from the player is the first display position. It has become. Then, a second display position, a third display position, and a fourth display position are provided in order toward the left end. Furthermore, in the following, the suspension display performed from the first display position to the fourth display position will be referred to as “storage 1”, “storage 2”, “storage 3”, and “storage 4”, respectively.

  For example, in the effect display device 60, a hold occurs while the effect pattern 190 relating to the first game is being performed, and a single hold display is not performed on the first hold number display unit 196. Then, the hold display is performed at the first display position at the right end (the position of the above-described "storage 1"). At this time, it is assumed that no other hold display has been performed yet, and "G2" to "G4" have not occurred. As described above, in the situation where "retention 1" is generated, if a further requisition is generated, the display relating to the generated requisition is performed at the position of "retention 2" on the left of "retention 1". Then, when "Hold 1" and "Hold 2" are displayed, and "Hold 3" and "Gold 4" are not displayed, if hold is further generated, "Hold 3" is displayed according to the number of held hold. And "G4" is displayed.

  Then, if the variable display being executed when "GREEN 1" occurs is ended, and other fluctuation start conditions related to the first game are also established, the pending storage information related to the above "GREEN 1" At the stage of being digested, the hold display of “storage 1” moves to the right of the first number-of-holds display portion 196. The fluctuation information display unit 195 is provided at the right side of the first hold count display unit 196. The variation information display unit 195 is an area for displaying information (the variation information) related to the variation display being executed at that time. That is, when the variable display according to the corresponding storage information is executed, the suspension display of “storage 1” moves to the fluctuation information display unit 195 and changes to the fluctuation information display 198.

  Here, when moving the hold display of “GREEN 1” to the fluctuation information display unit 195, display elements such as the size, color, and form of the item may be changed. In the example of FIGS. 7 (a) and 7 (b), the size is expanded when changing the hold display of “H01” to the fluctuation information display 198.

  As described above, when the pending display that has been in the "storage 1" moves to the fluctuation information display unit 195, the standby order of the subsequent suspension display is carried forward, and the "storage 2" shifts to the position of the "storage 1". Furthermore, when "G3" or "G4" exists, "G3" shifts to the position of "G2" and "G4" shifts to the position of "G3". Then, when a hold occurs further in such a situation, a "hold 4" is newly generated, and the number of holds reaches the upper limit. In addition, if a new hold does not occur, the shift of the hold display is performed with the start of the next variable display, and the waiting order of each hold is advanced.

  In addition, it is possible to be regarded as hold effect in a broad sense, including the state in which the fluctuation information display 198 in the fluctuation information display unit 195 has been changed from the hold display in “G1” to “G4”. The present invention is not limited to this, and it is treated as holding display until "Hold 1" to "Hold 4" is held, and does not include the state changed to the fluctuation information display 198 in the fluctuation information display unit 195 in the holding display. It is also possible.

  In addition, when fluctuation indication concerning production design 190 is not done, when the number of reservations is 0, there is a ball entry to the 1st starting winning a prize opening 62, the indication of “storage 1” is not done, the fluctuation information The fluctuation information display 198 is directly performed on the display unit 195. Then, only in such a case, it is possible to handle such that the fluctuation information display 198 in the fluctuation information display unit 195 is not included in the hold display.

  Subsequently, although the above-described second hold count display unit 197 will be described, the description of the same points as the first hold count display unit 196 will be omitted. In the present embodiment, as shown in the figure, the second hold count display unit 197 is opposite to the first hold count display unit 196 with the variation information display unit 195 described above (on the right side as viewed from the player) ) Are arranged such that the relationships of “G1” to “G4” are targeted in colors different from the first reserved image.

  Moreover, about a pending | holding display, it is possible to perform in the aspect according to various game states. For example, when the probability of a big hit lottery is a normal probability and a high probability, etc., it can be exemplified to make the modes of holding display different from each other when being controlled to different effect modes.

Furthermore, the positional relationship between the first number-of-holds display portion 196, the second number-of-holds display portion 197, and the fluctuation information display portion 195 is not limited to that described above, and the second game is performed as in the present embodiment. (1) The pachinko game machine of the type that performs the fluctuation display of the special symbol and the effect pattern 190 in the order of occurrence of the start winnings pertaining to the first game and the second game instead of executing in priority to the game Eight hold displays may be arranged on the left side of 195.
<< Pending look-ahead effect pertaining to special symbol >>

  Next, the reservation pre-reading effect which is one of the notice effects (pre-reading effect) concerning the special symbol is explained. The pending look-ahead effect is an effect to be executed based on the above-described pending storage information (first special view pending storage information or second pending storage information). In addition, with the prefetching presentation effect, the reach or big hit occurs to the pending for which the digestion is performed later than the effect being performed using the effect pattern 190 etc. at that time using the function of the above-mentioned prior information notification It is performed as an effect that suggests the expectation of doing.

  For example, with respect to the pending display occurring at the position of “Holding 3” in the above-described first pending number display unit 196, green pending display is performed unlike the display (for example, blue) which is the above basic display mode. It is shown that the degree of expectation such as the occurrence of reach is higher than in the case of the normal blue aspect. And in addition to blue and green coloring, display modes such as yellow, red, gold, iridescent, predetermined pattern etc. are provided, and the expectation of big hit in the order of yellow, red, gold, iridescent, predetermined pattern than green The effect is shown to indicate that the degree is high.

  Here, as a display mode of the above-mentioned "predetermined pattern", an animal pattern such as a giraffe, a display mode including a predetermined character image, and the like can be illustrated. Moreover, it is also possible to adopt not only the coloring and the pattern of the reserved display but also an item other than a perfect circle shape, a person image and the like. Furthermore, it is also possible to perform pre-reading effect by combining the above-mentioned various display modes with blinking or light emission. Moreover, it is possible to refer to, for example, “trigger hold” or the like for which hold on to pre-reading effect including pre-reading effect is held.

  The prefetching effect relating to the suspension as described above may be performed also in the second game. In addition to the basic color (orange), it is possible for the second game to have display modes such as red, gold, iridescent and predetermined patterns. In addition, it is also possible to adopt an item other than a true circular shape, a person image or the like as the hold display relating to the second game.

  Furthermore, the preread effect using the hold display in the first game and the second game as described above can be called "hold change" or the like. And such "hold change" indicates a display mode different from the basic display mode as described above from the beginning of the hold occurrence, or indicates a change of the display mode at the timing after the hold occurrence. is there.

  Among these, for example, a change occurs in the display mode at the timing after the occurrence of a hold, for example, a hold is generated and a hold display is started, the reservation of the hold progresses, and the hold display is, for example, “hold 2”, An example can be illustrated in which the pending display changes while advancing to "reserve 1". Then, for example, when the hold occurs, the hold display is performed in blue (in the case of the second game, orange) at the position of “Hare 3”, and when moving to the position of “Hare 1”, another color such as green Change, etc. is done.

  In addition, in any of the first game and the second game, when it becomes the fluctuation information display 198, from the basic color, the display mode such as red, gold, rainbow colors, a predetermined pattern, or true from the basic color, or true It may change to a display mode such as an item other than a circular shape or a person image, and may represent the expectation of the big hit.

  Furthermore, the following can be illustrated as a control aspect concerning the above-mentioned pending change. For example, when holding occurs, a lottery (holding change pattern lottery) is performed to determine an effect pattern (pending change pattern) of the holding change. The hold change pattern table is used for the hold change pattern lottery, and in the hold change pattern table, the presence / absence of the hold change, and when performing the hold change (in the case of the hold change), what kind of timing The matters relating to the determination of the rendering pattern, such as what display mode is to be executed, are defined. Also, as the hold change pattern, one for the first game and one for the second game are defined.

  Moreover, it is possible to cancel one of the pending look-ahead presentation effects when there are a plurality of the pending changes for the pending change from "Hai 1" to "Hai 4". More specifically, for example, when "Hot 4" occurs, the hold related to "Hot 4" corresponds to the hold change pattern changing to green, and any hold occurring first occurs, In the case of the pending change pattern changing to rainbow color, the pending change related to the above-mentioned “save 4” can be exemplified by canceling the pending change and not executing it.

Furthermore, for example, when "HARE 4" occurs as in the above-mentioned example, the hold related to "HARE 4" matches the hold change pattern that changes to the rainbow color, and all the hold that has previously occurred. However, if the rainbow color does not change and only the green changes to a pending change, the pending change occurring earlier may be canceled and not executed.
<< Continuous notice pertaining to special symbols >>

  Next, as another pre-reading effect pattern, continuous notice (continuous effect) relating to a special symbol will be described. This continuous notice includes genuine ones and fake ones. Of these, genuine continuous notices mean ones that provide continuous notice effects over a plurality of variable displays relating to special symbols. ing. In addition, the pseudo continuous notice means that an intermittent notice effect (pseudo continuous notice) is performed such that there is a change of a special symbol a plurality of times with respect to one time variable display relating to the special symbol.

  As the above-mentioned "continuous notice", for example, a character who becomes a main character in a story on presentation moves to a different room sequentially aiming at a room as an ultimate reaching purpose for each change of one time concerning a special symbol Can be exemplified. In addition, as "continuous advance notice" of other modes, the character who becomes the main character is to fight against a different enemy and win for each change of one time concerning the special symbol, and aim at the final target enemy Can also be illustrated.

  Furthermore, it is possible to carry out the above-mentioned genuine continuous notice (which may be referred to simply as "continuous notice" hereinafter) based on the advance notification information transmitted from the main board 102 to the sub main board 301. More specifically, for example, based on the prior notification information received when the hold of "Hear 3" occurs, sub main board 301, as the effect pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display which relates to the special symbol after that and subsequent It is possible to select one having contents including continuous notices over three variable displays.

  Then, when one hold is digested and the hold of the above-mentioned "G3" is shifted to the position of "G2", the first of the effect patterns relating to the selected consecutive notices. An effect pattern relating to the advance notice is executed. Furthermore, when the suspension is sequentially digested, and the suspension display moves from “G2” to “G1”, the second notice of three times is executed, and the fluctuation information is displayed from “G1”. When moving to the unit 195, the final third notice is executed.

  It should be noted that in the sub main board 301, the fluctuation pattern according to the fluctuation display being executed at the time when the above-mentioned "retention of 3" occurs, or "previous 2" or "retention 1" that has occurred before that. It is also possible to confirm such pending storage information. That is, when the above-mentioned "G3" suspension occurs, information indicating that a predetermined reach effect with high jackpot reliability is to be executed, or a jackpot occurs among various information already stored. If there is information representing “to do”, it is possible to cancel the effect pattern relating to the continuous advance notice selected when the “Hot 3” hold occurs. In addition, depending on the expectation of the retention for "G3", it does not give a continuous announcement immediately from the next fluctuation, but waits for one fluctuation, "G1" fluctuation and pre-readout mode 2 There may be a case where continuous announcements are made across changes.

  In addition, as the above-mentioned pseudo continuous notice (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "pseudo continuous notice"), reach display is intermittently performed a plurality of times in the effect pattern according to one time variable display of a special symbol. It is possible to illustrate such a thing, a thing that a character repeats a plurality of actions, and a thing that repeats temporary stop and re-variation of the effect pattern 190, and the like.

The contents of the continuous notice as described above are merely examples, and various contents other than those described can be adopted as the contents of the continuous notice.
<< Demonstrate pattern pertaining to ordinary pattern >>

  Next, the effects relating to the above-mentioned normal symbol will be described. In the present embodiment, the effect display related to the normal symbol is not performed. However, it is possible to perform the effect relating to the normal symbol as a part of the effect in the effect display device 60. And when performing the effect display of a normal symbol in this way, it is possible to perform the display of the grade which can distinguish a kind of a hit and a hit, for example as an effect pattern.

  Further, as described above, when the effect display device 60 is configured by a combination of a plurality of display bodies, the effect display device 60 is provided with a relatively large display body and small display bodies (or a plurality of display bodies) compared thereto. It is possible. Then, a large display body can be referred to as, for example, a "main display body" or a "main liquid crystal", and a small display body can be referred to as, for example, a "sub display body" or a "sub liquid crystal". Furthermore, when the relatively small display body as described above is provided, the effect pattern (199) according to the normal pattern may be displayed on the small display body, for example. In addition, for example, an LED indicator light may be provided as a set of two at a predetermined portion of the center decoration 64 described above, and this may be used as a effect display device related to a normal symbol.

In addition, when performing the effect using the effect pattern according to the normal symbol, it is possible to perform the on-hold effect display according to the normal symbol as a part of the effect in the effect display device 60. Further, as described above, when the effect display device 60 is configured by a plurality of display bodies such as a large display body and a small display body, for example, a small display for effect hold display relating to a normal symbol It may be displayed on the body. In addition, for example, an LED indicator light in which two are set as one set is provided at a predetermined part of the above-mentioned center decoration 64, thereby performing effect display of the number of reservations pertaining to the normal symbols from "1" to "4" It is also good.
<< Production pertaining to limited frequency pattern >>

  Next, effects relating to the limited frequency pattern (hereinafter referred to as “limited frequency pattern effects”) will be described. The limited frequency pattern effect is provided as part of the effect pattern described above. Furthermore, the limited frequency rendition pattern rendition is a rendition set so as to easily appear in a predetermined gaming state, corresponding to the fluctuation pattern determined in a specific period by the pattern determination means of the main board. The content of the limited frequency pattern effect is effect content indicating a specific tendency, and as the content of the limited frequency pattern effect, for example, in a specific variation during time saving game, a predetermined variation pattern is a main substrate It can be determined, and it can be exemplified to produce a reach with high reliability as an effect.

In addition, as a game situation where a limited frequency pattern effect is likely to appear, at the time of game start, immediately after a predetermined effect pattern is executed (for example, immediately after a small hit or an out ball no hit), a predetermined effect mode (probable variation, In the short time game mode), immediately after the end of the special game, etc. can be exemplified. In addition to these, as a game situation where a limited frequency pattern effect is likely to appear, the number of reservations for the first game (or the second game) has reached a predetermined number (for example, four), or the reservation is The case where it does not exist etc. can be illustrated. Furthermore, in the situation where the limited frequency pattern effect is executed, the effect pattern to be executed is performed from the limited frequency pattern defined in the limited frequency table, using the limited frequency table provided in advance according to the situation at that time. It is to be selected.
<< Direction using operation buttons >>

  Next, an effect (hereinafter referred to as “button effect”) using the above-described operation button 22 (see FIG. 1) will be described. The operation button 22 is pressed by the player when the button effect is executed, and exerts a function of giving the player the feeling that he / she is participating in the effect of the game or the winning or losing lottery. is there. As the button effect, for example, in the process of fluctuating and displaying the effect pattern 190 (see FIGS. 7A and 7B), “Push”, “Consecutively hit” in the display area 194 of the effect display device 60 with the pattern of the operation button 22 It can be exemplified to display a guide prompting operation such as characters such as “long press please” or a moving image of an indicator indicating the remaining time.

  Further, as the button effect, when the player operates the operation button 22 in accordance with the above-described guide display, an effect such that the character emits a comment or an effect such that the ally character attacks the enemy character can be exemplified. Moreover, when the operation button 22 is operated, the above-mentioned movable effect member 93 etc. operate, and a thing alerting | reporting becoming reach can also be illustrated. Furthermore, a button effect may be performed during reach effect, and in this case, when the operation button 22 is operated, the above-described movable effect member 93 or the like operates to obtain an expectation to a big hit.

  Further, with regard to the operation button 22 described above, the operation of the operation button 22 is normally invalid, but during the button effect, the button operation valid period is such that the operation of the operation button 22 is valid. The button operation effective period is a constant time set in advance.

  A vibration motor or a solenoid (not shown) is combined with the operation button 22 to vibrate the operation button 22. For example, the operation range of the operation button 22 is expanded by using a driving source such as a motor. It is also possible to adopt an effect mode such as making 22 go wild. Furthermore, when making operation button 22 project and sink, it is also possible to set projection amount comparatively large (for example, about 5 to 10 cm).

  Further, the operation button 22 is not limited to one having a small outside dimension (for example, about several centimeters), and may be in the form of a semi-sphere of about several tens of centimeters or the like. Furthermore, as the operation input device such as the operation button 22, various other types of devices can be adopted. For example, an operation handle of a car, an operation lever of an aircraft, a model of a character related to presentation contents It is also possible to adopt one in which a touch sensor is added to (figure). It is also possible to use a relatively small control button 22 and a control lever or the like in combination, and use them in accordance with the situation such as the contents of the effect.

Furthermore, as described above, a cross key (not shown) is provided in the vicinity of the operation button 22, and the operation button 22 may be used as a determination key or the like in a situation where environment setting or the like is performed. Then, in the present embodiment, in the situation where the variation display of the rendering pattern 190 etc. is performed by the presentation display device 60 or the situation where the variation display is not performed, the presentation operation using the operation button 22 and the cross key is a line May be
<< Direction at the time of big hit occurrence >>

  Next, the effects when a big hit occurs will be described. Effects when a big hit occurs, effects at the start of the special game (big hit start demonstration), effects during the special game (round effect), effects at the end of the last round (hit end demonstration), at the end of the special game There are production (big hit end demonstration) and the like.

  When the above-mentioned effect pattern 190 is decided and stopped, it is displayed that a big hit is to be started along with a sound such as a fanfare. Furthermore, it is possible to exemplify a content of performing a right-handed guidance effect as a striking instruction during a special game, and guiding the player to perform right-handling by increasing the amount of rotation of the launch handle 20.

  As the above-mentioned special game effect, it is possible to illustrate a moving image of content that can not be viewed unless the player has won the big hit. At this time, a predetermined music is output from the aforementioned speaker 21 (see FIG. 1). Furthermore, as a moving image during a special game, for example, a predetermined character in a dramatography adopted for directing the pachinko gaming machine 10 depicts a state of fighting a rival enemy as a rival, and a state of enjoying a whistle Can be illustrated.

  In the special game, for example, “1R”, “2R”,... In the corner (for example, upper right corner) of the display area 194 (see FIGS. 7A and 7B). , “15R” can be notified. Furthermore, as part of the special game, for example, it is possible to display the number of occurrences of the big hit when a big hit occurs during a specific game and the big hit is continuous.

  Then, as an effect after the above-mentioned special game, what relates to a result of an effect content in a special game can be illustrated. More specifically, the content etc. which a winner represents an emotion can be illustrated according to the result of the fight between characters. The effect after such a special game can also be called an ending effect.

Furthermore, as the effect after the special game, it is possible to illustrate what additionally displays the number of consecutive times of the big hit, and what displays the number of balls awarded by the player by the special game at that time. In addition, it is also possible to additionally display the number of occurrences of the big hit when a big hit occurs during the specific game and the big hit is continuous. Further, with regard to the jackpot continuation, it is also possible to execute an effect pattern that is not selected before that when the jackpot generation number reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 20 times).
<Various examples of concrete effects>
<< Effect by superposition of multiple effect members >>

  Next, various concrete effects that can be implemented in the pachinko gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described with examples. First, it is possible to perform an effect by superimposing the display of the effect display device 60, the display of the light guide plate 90 described above, and the movable effect member (for example, reference numeral 93). This type of effect is a complex effect by positioning the movable effect member in front of the effect display device 60 and combining the display content of the effect display device 60 with the light decoration or movement of the movable effect member.

  As an example, at least a part of the display area 194 of the effect display device 60 is visible outside the movable effect member, and for example, when an image of the flame burning on the effect display device 60 is displayed, the flame is displayed. The combination of the movable effect member performing light decoration and operation is performed in front of the. Furthermore, in the light guide plate 90, for example, effects such as flashing of a flame pattern or effects of blinking a rippled pattern are performed, so that the difference between the distance and distance between the light guide plate 90 and the effect display device 60 Visual effects can be exhibited.

  Furthermore, in this state, by performing the effect by the movable effect member between the light guide plate 90 and the effect display device 60, the state of the movable effect member and the image of the effect display device 60 are displayed on the light guide plate 90. It can be made to be visible to the player while being partially obstructive. Furthermore, by combining changes in the pattern-like display before and after the movable effect member, complicated situation display can be superimposed on the movable effect member, and it becomes possible to express the environment in which the movable effect member is placed in a complicated manner. .

  And by these things, more complicated rendition can be performed by the limited composition of the light-guide plate 90, a movable effect member (for example, code 93 etc.), and the effect display apparatus 60, and it is possible to diversify an effect It becomes. Even when the light guide plate 90 is changed to, for example, a transmissive liquid crystal display, a part of the transmissive liquid crystal display can be displayed by the movable effect member (for example, reference numeral 93) behind it or the display of the effect display device 60. By setting the transmission state to such an extent that a part of the content can be visually recognized, it is possible to perform effects by superposition as in the case of the light guide plate 90.

  In addition, as a mode of utilization of the light guide plate 90, the transmission liquid crystal display body, etc. (herein referred to as the light guide plate 90 etc.), a mode of emphasizing the light guide plate 90 etc. and a mode by combination of the effect display device 60 are adopted. It is possible. The above-mentioned “mode for emphasizing the light guide plate 90 and the like” performs color display for making a predetermined image float using most of the display surface of the light guide plate 90 and the like, and displays the display content of the effect display device 60 behind it. This is a display mode in which the player's awareness is not as directed as possible.

On the other hand, the above-mentioned "aspect of the combination with the effect display device 60" suppresses the ratio of the area of the light guide plate 90 or the like where the color display is performed to a predetermined degree, and displays the effect display device 60 behind. This is a display mode in which the effect of the combination of the display of the light guide plate 90 etc. and the display of the effect display device 60 is shown to the player so that the player's awareness of the content is directed. Then, in a predetermined case, the effect in the “mode of emphasizing the light guide plate 90 etc.” is performed, and in the other predetermined case, the effect in the “mode by combination with the effect display device 60” is performed. And so on.
<< Timer display related to the development of the effect >>

  In addition, as display contents on the effect display device 60, it is possible to perform timer display (timer effect) relating to the development of the effect. More specifically, for example, the timer display area appears in a predetermined case in the variable display (during variable display) of the effect pattern 190. As arrangement | positioning of this timer display area, a site | part etc. can be illustrated in the lower right in the display area 194 of the effect display apparatus 60. FIG.

  In the above-described timer display area, for example, display such as "70:00" is performed. The display of "70:00" or the like implies that there is development of the effect after 70 seconds, and the countdown display every one hundredth of a second is continued after the start of the display. Then, when the display in the timer display area becomes "00:00", the effect is advanced so that the fluctuation effect develops and the expectation of the big hit increases.

  The time displayed in the above-mentioned timer display area may be various, such as 20 seconds, 40 seconds, etc., in addition to those relating to 70 seconds. Also, for example, there is a complex timer effect in which a countdown of 20 seconds is added as a count display relating to the development of further effects after the countdown of 40 seconds is over. Moreover, the timer display performs a big hit decision by performing a resurrection production when the number of seconds remains even when the display (if all symbols are temporarily stopped) is displayed as if the display of the fluctuation effect has ended. It can also be considered to be used as an suggestive effect itself.

As a display mode in the above-mentioned timer display area, for example, “in preparation (standby)”, “START” or the like is displayed prior to the start of the countdown, or with the end of the countdown, “CHANGE It is also possible to display "(hold change)", "CHANCE (chance up)", "NEXT (simulated link, re-fluctuation)", "congratulation (hit)" and the like. Moreover, it is not limited to performing the countdown to the development of the effect, for example, the combination of the effect pattern 190 such as "777" may be displayed along with the end of the countdown, and the occurrence of the big hit may be notified. It is possible. Also, the display of the countdown is fixed at the moment when it reaches "07: 77", "05: 55", etc. (Timer freeze effect), and it is suggested that the effect pattern 190 be stopped in the big hit mode finally In addition to the effect corresponding to the timer which is stopped at 03:00 "and the player has estimated from the timer time, an effect may be provided which suggests that another chance up is displayed.
<< Production using the production design >>

  Also, various effects can be illustrated as the effect using the effect pattern 190. For example, it is possible to change the left effect pattern 190a and the right effect pattern 190c to another form in a situation where the left effect pattern 190a and the right effect pattern 190c are temporarily stopped and the middle effect pattern 190b is in motion. . As a mode after the change of the left production | presentation design 190a and the right production | presentation design 190c at this time, a predetermined | prescribed bracket symbol etc. can be illustrated, for example. Then, change the middle effect pattern 190b during the change to words such as "NEXT", "one more time", "still still!", Etc., and display a character image in which the left and right of the word are sandwiched by predetermined brackets. Let

  As described above, the effect of changing the effect pattern 190 into a display mode of a property different from that before can be used as an effect for connecting the effect before the development and the effect after the development. In addition, as a character image in which a word such as the above “NEXT” is sandwiched by parentheses, providing a character image with relatively low development and high hit expectations (for example, white and red color of the character string of NEXT) It is also possible to make them different in gold, etc.).

  Here, when the effect pattern 190 changes to a display mode of another property in this manner, in the effect display device 60, a reduced-size effect pattern (not shown) is displayed on a predetermined portion (upper right corner or left end) It is possible to display in). By displaying this reduced-size effect pattern, it is possible to increase the freedom of effect display in the effect display device 60 while maintaining the notification function of displaying the variation of the special symbol. In addition, in order to distinguish the production design (190) of the reduced size and the production design 190 of the size before the reduction, for example, the production design before the reduction is referred to as a "first effect design" etc. It is possible to call the following production design "a 2nd production design" etc.

  Further, as another aspect of the effect using the effect pattern 190, it is also possible to adopt an effect such as double reach or triple reach in which a combination of a plurality of reach is displayed simultaneously. Furthermore, it is also possible to adopt an effect that develops from double reach to triple reach during one change production.

  In addition, as another aspect of the effect using the effect pattern 190, when the variable display of the effect pattern 190 is started, the effect is suggested using the effect pattern (here, the inside effect pattern 190b) to be finally stopped. Is possible. More specifically, a part of the human figure in the middle effect pattern 190b (element pattern which is the above non-symbol element effect pattern) performs an animation operation to emit a line, and as a sound output, a predetermined line for notice at the start of fluctuation Can be exemplified.

  Further, as another aspect of the effect using the effect pattern 190, when the player continuously strikes the above-mentioned operation button 22, at least one of the effect patterns 190a to 190c in the left, in the left, in an aspect corresponding to the continuous action. It is possible to adopt what is displayed. And as a "mode according to a continuous hit", the thing that at least one of the production | presentation patterns 190a-190c of the left middle right shakes (is vibrated) can be illustrated, for example.

Further, as the “aspect according to the continuous hit”, it is possible to exemplify one in which the rendering symbol is operated once (a design in which the operation and the operation are synchronized) each time the operation of the operation button 22 is detected. In addition, when it is detected that the operation button 22 is continuously hit, it is possible to illustrate an example of displaying an animation of the contents of the effect pattern shaking (oscillating). Then, in order to detect that the operation button 22 has been continuously hit, for example, it is determined whether or not an operation of a predetermined number of times (for example, a plurality of times such as twice) is detected within a predetermined time (for example 1 second). And so on.
<< Direction using hold display >>

  Then, various things can be illustrated also as an effect using the above-mentioned suspension display. For example, the fluctuation information display 198 of the fluctuation information display unit 195 shown in FIGS. 7A and 7B is once erased, and the fluctuation information display unit 195 is expected to see, for example, “color change?” Display character information (character state transition suggestion information) that suggests that the degree increases. Then, after the display of such state transition indication information, the fluctuation information display 198 in the fluctuation information display unit 195 may be changed to mean high expectation such as red or rainbow color, for example. Do.

  It is also possible to display a display such as "color change?" Described above as one roulette eye or one pattern of a rotating drum (reel). For example, information displays such as “no change”, “color change?”, “Red”, and “rainbow” are adopted as the roulette eye and the pattern of the rotating drum, and the roulette and the rotation are Display drum objects. Then, in the variation information display unit 195, the display of "no change", "color change?", "Red", and "rainbow" sequentially changes, and the subsequent variation information is displayed in a mode corresponding to the stopped information. It is contemplated that 198 will be done. In addition, it is also possible to display an object of a roulette or a rotary drum without erasing the fluctuation information display 198.

Further, as another aspect of the effect using the hold display, when the hold change is performed in the first hold number display unit 196 and the second hold number display unit 197 in FIGS. 7A and 7B, the hold operation is performed. For example, it is considered to actively notify that there has been a change or that a pending change occurs immediately, by displaying pending change information such as “pending change”, “red pending”, “rainbow pending”, etc. Be Here, the display of such holding change information may be performed at the center of the display area 194 in the effect display device 60, or the holding change in the first holding number display unit 196 or the second holding number display unit 197. It may be performed in the vicinity of the pending display.
<< Production using movable presentation members >>

  Subsequently, various effects can be illustrated as effects using the above-described movable effect members (93, 94, etc.). For example, it is possible to use a movable effect member (drum unit) in which a plurality of rotating drums (reels) are arranged in a predetermined arrangement (for example, 2 rows and 2 columns) as one of the movable effect members. Then, when the rotation drums are individually controlled to rotate, and the characters or symbols arranged on the drums constitute a predetermined combination at the time of stop (including temporary stop), effects are developed. Can be illustrated. As an arrangement location of such a drum unit, the upper part etc. of the effect display apparatus 60 can be illustrated. Furthermore, it is also possible to perform an effect such as the drum unit falling from the upper part of the effect display device 60 to the central part in a predetermined case.

  Further, as another aspect of the effect using the movable effect member, the movable effect member formed of the light transmitting material is provided, and the entire effect of the display region 194 of the effect display device 60 or the light passing through the movable effect member It is possible to make a part visible. Furthermore, different types of movable effect members are arranged back and forth, the above-mentioned light transmissive movable effect members are arranged forward (closer to the player), and the movable effect members behind through the forward movable effect members are arranged. Can be made visible.

  Further, as another aspect of the effect using the movable effect member, a plurality of (for example, two) small display bodies as described above are provided, and the plurality of display bodies are at least at least of the vertical direction, the horizontal direction, and the oblique direction. It is possible to combine adjacently in one direction. More specifically, for example, two rectangular displays are supported swingably to the left and right around an axis extending in the front-rear direction. And each display body is arrange | positioned above the display area 194 of the effect display apparatus 60, and the downward direction (It may be left direction and right direction.).

  Furthermore, when a predetermined effect is performed, the upper display body is lowered and the lower display body is raised so that each display body approaches in front of the display area 194. Then, the lower side of the upper display body and the upper side of the lower display body are horizontally and parallelly opposed, and the both display bodies are vertically adjacent to each other. And a predetermined | prescribed presentation effect is performed by each display body, and the presentation by the combination of two display bodies is performed.

In addition, when another predetermined effect is executed, the angles of the upper and lower display bodies are changed, and the posture of each display body is, for example, diagonally upward from the horizontal state from the horizontal state while the screen is directed to the front. Change to the state of That is, the upper side and the lower side of each display body in the rectangle are in an inclined state rising left, and accordingly, the left side and the right side of each display body are inclined state rising upward. Then, the two display bodies are moved so as to approach each other in front of the display area 194, and the lower side of the upper display body and the upper side of the lower display body are diagonally and parallel to each other, Adjacent.
<< Other productions >>

  As effects other than the various effects as described above, stop (including temporary stop) of the effect pattern 190 in the effect display device 60 should be performed immediately after the predetermined effect outside the display area 194 of the effect display device 60 Is considered. More specifically, in the effect display device 60, for example, the light decoration portion of the center decoration 64 or the movable circle effect member (93, 94, etc.) in a situation where at least one of the effect symbols 190a to 190c is changing. A predetermined light decoration effect is performed by the light decoration part of.

  In the above-mentioned light decoration effect, for example, it can be expected that the player removes the line of sight from the effect display device 60, such as performing the light emission of relative intensity only once instantaneously rather than the normal effect. Is desirable. Then, immediately after the light decoration effect (for example, within one second), the effect pattern 190 is stopped (including a temporary stop) at a 3-digit index indicating the occurrence of a big hit. By such an effect, it is possible to give the player an impression that a big hit has occurred in the gap when the user looks away during the change.

  Further, as other effects, in addition to outputting words in the effect as sound, characters representing the words are displayed on the effect display device 60, and the display of words is switched according to the speed of the sound output. Is considered. More specifically, when voice output of a line saying “This one is nothing else” is started, information that can identify the character who emits a line on the effect display device 60 (here, the name “A In addition to "), the letters" A: I'm not here to call you "is displayed. Then, when the line to be voice-output shifts to the next "There is something I want to see by all means", the characters "A: There is a thing I want by all means to see" is displayed on the effect display device 60 .

  Furthermore, when the line to be voice-outputted shifts to "What do you want to show?" By character B, "B: What do you want to show?" Characters are displayed. In this manner, by showing the speech of the characters in a combination of the voice output and the character display to the player, the player can be clearly informed of the contents of the presentation even when the quick dialogue is performed. Can.

  In addition, since characters are displayed after showing characters, characters different from characters showing characters and characters uttering characters are displayed on the screen. Even when voice output is performed in a situation where it is present, it is possible to clearly convey the effect contents to the player.

  Further, as another effect, for example, a movable display member such as a shoji or shutter may be further provided on the small display body to hide the display content behind. It is also conceivable to provide a shoji, shutter, curtain, curtain, scratch film or the like as an object to be displayed as an image.

  Moreover, it is possible to employ | adopt what can operate other than pressing operation as the operation button 22 as another production. Then, as operations other than the pressing operation, it is possible to exemplify a touch operation with a touch panel and a twisting operation that the player holds and turns. Moreover, it is possible to employ | adopt the operation button apparatus which can perform two or more of these various operation modes. When the operation button device capable of performing the plurality of modes of operation is adopted, it is conceivable to guide the operation mode to be executed by the player as the guide display according to the button operation as described above. .

  In addition, as another effect, it is possible to display a two-dimensional code, for example, during a change effect. Then, in this case, the player takes out a portable terminal such as a smartphone during the variable effect, reads a two-dimensional code using the camera function of the portable terminal, accesses a predetermined external server, and plays a game or a model It is conceivable to be able to acquire such various information.

  Further, as another effect, in the situation where the effect is developed in the effect display device 60 when, for example, the character of "progress" is displayed, the character of "Ball" is displayed, and It is conceivable to display a roulette or a rotating drum (reel) on the right side. Then, it is possible to adopt such an effect that the character of "exhibition" is one eye of roulette or the design of one rotating drum, and the effect develops when the character of "exhibition" stops.

In addition, as another effect, for example, in a situation where the effect develops when a predetermined character appears, it is possible to display a timer for the time until the character appears. This timer display may be a time shorter than the time until the end of the fluctuation effect at that time, as in the example of the effect described above. In addition to this, the time may be longer than the time until the end of the fluctuation production at that time, and in this case, the timer display is executed as one of the above-mentioned genuine continuous notices. Is possible.
<Various commands sent from main board to sub main board>

  Next, various commands transmitted from the main board 102 to the sub main board 301 will be described. The following description will be made on the basis of the commands relating to the normal motor vehicle and the other main commands, but here, the main commands other than the commands relating to the normal motor vehicle will be described first. First, as the transmission timing of the command, during the initial screen display, during the customer waiting demo (standby demo), at the time of symbol fluctuation start of the special symbol, at the time of symbol confirmation of the special symbol, during symbol confirmation of the special symbol, at the big hit start demonstration, When the big hit medium large winning opening is open, when the big hit middle large winning opening is closed, there is a hit end demonstration, a big hit end demonstration end, etc. Among these, during the initial screen display, it is a period from when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 10 is turned on to when the customer waiting demo is started and the steady state is entered. In addition, at the start winning, at the time of power failure recovery, and at the time of error detection, command transmission is performed in any case. Furthermore, command transmission is also performed when RWM is cleared.

  Among these, as the command at the time of RWM clearing, there are a command of initialization of the effect display, initialization of the effect LED, and various errors. The effect indicator initialization command is for displaying a predetermined effect pattern on the effect display device 60. The effect LED initialization command is to light part of the game effect lamp when communication is normal. The various error commands are for displaying effects etc. in accordance with the state of the error.

  There is a customer waiting demo command as a customer waiting demonstration command. The customer waiting demonstration command is for setting the effect display device 60 and the game effect lamp for the customer waiting demonstration and erasing the sound.

  As a command at the start of symbol fluctuation of special symbol, symbol 1 memory number, symbol 2 memory number, communication inspection 1, communication inspection 2, effect frequency A to Z, effect selection state 0 to 2, fluctuation additional information, symbol 1 effect There are commands of pattern, symbol 2 effect pattern, symbol 1 character effect, and symbol 2 character effect. The symbol 1 storage number command indicates the number of pending storages of the first special symbol, and the symbol 2 storage number command indicates the number of pending storages of the second special symbol. The communication check 1 command and the communication check 2 command are for confirming whether normal communication is performed. The various commands of the number of times of presentation A to Z indicate the number of times concerning the effects according to the above-mentioned limited frequency table, and the various commands of the effect selection states 0 to 2 indicate the types of effects according to the limited frequency table It is a thing. The fluctuation additional information command indicates information for adding an element (reproduction constituent element) that indicates, for example, an expectation of a big hit in the rendition pattern. The symbol 1 effect pattern command is for transmitting a command corresponding to the variation pattern of the first special symbol, and the symbol 2 effect pattern command is for transmitting a command corresponding to the variation pattern of the second special symbol. It is a thing. The symbol 1 character effect command is for transmitting a command corresponding to the symbol of the first special symbol, and the symbol 2 character effect command is for transmitting a command corresponding to the symbol of the second special symbol. is there.

  As commands at the time of symbol determination of the special symbol, there are commands of symbol 1 effect pattern stop and symbol 2 effect pattern stop. The symbol 1 effect pattern stop command and the symbol 2 effect pattern stop command are for stopping the effect pattern 190 based on the first special symbol and the second special symbol, respectively.

  As commands during symbol determination of special symbol, fluctuation time reduction number 0 (at low probability), fluctuation time reduction number A to Z (at low probability), fluctuation time reduction number 0 (at high probability), during probability fluctuation (time) Command of up to a predetermined number of fluctuations). These are for transmitting a command related to the gaming state at that time, and are used for effect mode display, time-saving display, and the like.

  As a command at the time of the big hit start demonstration, there are a command of the design 1 big hit start demonstration, a design 2 big hit start demonstration, the launch position specification. The symbol 1 big hit start demonstration command and the symbol 2 big hit start demonstration command are for displaying a start demonstration based on the big hit symbols of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. The launch position designation command is used to inform the launch position when the player is to strike the game ball between the first large winning opening 91 and the second large winning opening 92 by so-called left or right hitting. belongs to.

  As a command at the time of big hit medium large winning a prize opening opening, there is a command of demonstration 1-16 during pattern 1 big hit, demonstration 1-16 during pattern 2 big hit. These are for displaying effects based on the jackpot symbols and the number of rounds of the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

  As a command at the time of big hit medium large winning a prize opening closing, there is large winning a prize opening closing production command. This is for displaying the special winning opening closing effect.

  As a command at the time of the big hit end demonstration, there is a command of the end demonstration per symbol, the command of the end demonstration per 2 symbols. These are for displaying a hit end demonstration effect based on the hit symbols of the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

  The commands at the time of starting winning prize include a notice of winning notice (per notice production), a notice of symbol notice (per notice symbol production), a notice of fluctuation (pattern notice effect), a memory of symbol 1 and a memory of symbol 2. Each command of hit notice, symbol notice, and change notice is a command (pre-read command) related to the above-mentioned pre-reading effect by the pre-information notifying means 157. The hit notice command is for transmitting the random value range of the pass / fail random number, and includes information of the pass / fail according to the lottery probability. The symbol advance command is for transmitting a random value range of symbol random numbers, and includes information related to the type of hit. Furthermore, the fluctuation advance notice command is for transmitting a random number range of the fluctuation pattern, and can be used to specify the type of the fluctuation pattern group (no reach, normal reach, super reach, etc.). The command of the symbol 1 memory number and the symbol 2 memory number is for conveying the number of pending storages of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. Then, in the present embodiment, as a result of the success or failure lottery, information such as presence / absence of pre-reading effect, period, etc. is transmitted to the sub main board 301 by each command of hit notice, symbol notice, and change notice.

  As a command at the time of power failure return, communication inspection 1, communication inspection 2, gaming state A to E for power failure return, number of times of presentation A to Z, effect selection state 0 to 2, pattern 1 character effect, pattern 2 character effect, There is a command of power failure return hit state, power failure return special symbol 1 state, power failure return special symbol 2 state, firing position designation, errors a to d, number of symbol 1 memory, number of symbol 2 memory.

  The commands of the communication inspection 1 and the communication inspection 2 are for confirming whether or not normal communication is performed. The commands of the game states A to E for power failure recovery are for transmitting different commands according to the game state at the time of power failure. The command of the number of effects A to Z indicates the number of times related to the effect according to the above-mentioned limited frequency table, and the command of the effect selection states 0 to 2 indicates the type of effect according to the limited frequency table is there. The symbol 1 character effect and the symbol 2 character effect command are for transmitting commands corresponding to the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

The power failure return state command is for transmitting a different command depending on whether or not it is hit. The command of special symbol 1 state at power off return and special symbol 2 state at power off return sends the command according to the first special symbol or the second special symbol according to the state such as waiting, fluctuation, hit etc. It is for. As described above, the launch position specification command is for designating an appropriate launch position according to the situation. Errors a to d are for transmitting the presence and type of an error. The command of the symbol 1 memory number and the symbol 2 memory number is for conveying the number of pending storages of the first special symbol and the second special symbol.
<Main control processing of main board>

  Next, main control processing in the main substrate 102 of the pachinko gaming machine 10 having the above-described configuration will be described based on FIGS. Prior to the description, the terms "special motorized part", "condition device", and "parts continuous actuation device" used in the following will be described. Each of these represents a conceptual device in the control process of the pachinko gaming machine 10, and among these, the "special electric winning combination" operates the first large winning opening 91 and the second large winning opening 92. It will be In addition, the "condition device" operates when a specific symbol combination is displayed as a special symbol as a stop display, and the "character continuous actuation device" operates the special electric role a plurality of times in succession. It is possible to

The main control processes of the pachinko gaming machine 10 described here are the control start process shown in FIGS. 11 and 12, the game progress interrupt process shown in FIG. 13, and the power-off process shown in FIG. Is executed on the main board 102.
<Control start processing>

The control start process shown in FIGS. 11 and 12 is a control process that is started after the security check using the production code of the CPU 501 is performed by turning on the power of the pachinko gaming machine 10, and in this control start process, After performing the settings (S1 to S4) necessary for turning on the power, the operation state (S5) of the initialization switch 544, the power failure information flag (power failure confirmation information) in the power failure status confirmation process (S6 to S8) Processing at the time of power failure return (S9 to S17), processing at the time of initialization of RWM (S24 to S26), and clock setting for game progress interruption corresponding to the value and the addition result (checksum data) of RWM area Processing (S27), circulation processing (S32 (S28 to S31)), and the like are executed.
<< Required setting at power on >>

  As settings required at power on, setting of the stack pointer (S1), setting of the interrupt mode (S2), and setting of access permission to the RWM 503 (S3) are performed, followed by initialization of the built-in registers ( S4).

Among them, in the process of setting the stack pointer (S1), in order to secure the stack area, the stack pointer is set as an initial value of the stack pointer, and the stack pointer is set to a specific address. Next, in the interrupt mode setting (S2), a mode of a predetermined number is set, and in the RWM access permission setting (S3), access permission data is set in a predetermined register to permit access to the RWM. Do. As a result, the maskable interrupt is set to a specific interrupt mode, and the CPU built-in RWM is allowed access. Further, in the setting of the built-in register (S4), corresponding setting values such as a game progress interrupt use setting value and a clock source selection value are set using the built-in register initial setting table. The interrupt in the main board 102 will be described later.
<< Checking the operation state of the RWM clear switch >>

  In the process of confirming the operation state of the initialization switch 544 (S5), the state of the output signal of the initialization switch 544 input through the input port is confirmed. It is determined whether the RWM clear switch has been pressed (turned on) or not (S5: NO), the value of the power-off information flag in the power-off situation determination process (S6 to S8) described later The process proceeds to the determination process (S6) of On the other hand, if the initialization switch 544 is pressed (S5: YES), the processing at the time of RWM initialization (S24 to S26) is performed.

Here, it is determined that the initialization switch 544 is operated when the RWM clear switch bit of the corresponding input port is determined to be on five times in a row. In addition, the determination of the information as to whether or not the initialization switch 544 is pressed is performed only once at this time, and the determination is not performed thereafter.
<< Status check process at power off >>

  In the power-off state confirmation process (S6 to S8) when the initialization switch 544 is not operated, whether the value of the power-off information flag is read and the read value matches predetermined power-off normal data It is determined whether or not it is (S6). The power-off normal data is stored when the process of power-off is normally performed when the power-off (power-off) when the power is turned off occurs.

  If the value of the power-off information flag matches the power-off normal data (S6: YES), checksum data is calculated (S7). In the process of calculating the checksum data, although not shown, an initial value is set as checksum data, and after a predetermined operation is performed on the checksum data, the checksum data after the operation is 0. A determination is made as to whether it is different from

If the checksum data is not 0 (S8: NO), that is, if the restart preparation processing execution condition is not satisfied, the RWM head high order is set to the high order of the reference value of the relative address. The process proceeds to the process at the time of initialization (from S24). On the other hand, when the checksum data is 0 (S8: YES), the process proceeds to processing (S9 to S17) at the time of power failure recovery described later.
<< Processing when power is restored >>

  In the process upon power failure recovery, the value of the stack pointer buffer is set in the stack pointer, and the stack pointer is returned to the value saved at the time of power failure (S9). Furthermore, in order to inspect the communication line between the main board 102 and the sub board 104, a request to transmit a rendering control command to the sub board 104 is requested (S10, S11), a decoration lamp (game effect lamp) and a sound effect (sound In order to return the effect of the effect) to the state before the occurrence of the power failure, a request for transmitting the effect control command to the sub substrate 104 is made (S10, S11). Further, in order to request a command corresponding to the number of operation pending balls of the special symbol display device, a symbol storage number command request process is executed (S12).

  Further, the solenoid is returned to the output state before the occurrence of the power failure (S13). Specifically, the open / closed state of the second start winning opening 63, the first large winning opening 91, and the second large winning opening 92 is restored to the state before the power is turned off.

  Thereafter, the process proceeds to the process of setting the special symbol (S14), and the information of the operating state of the probability variation function of the special symbol display device (70, 71) is set. Next, setting of power supply recovery (S15), data storage processing (S16), and detection setting of communication line abnormality with the payout control board (S17) are executed.

  Subsequently, in the process of starting the game progress interrupt process, the address of the PTC 0 counter setting register is set to start the game progress interrupt, and the count value of a predetermined size (here, about 4 ms) is set to the PTC 0 counter. It is set in the register (S18). As a result, a game progress interrupt is generated every 4 ms.

  Then, processing of restoration of various registers excluding the flag register is executed (S19), and processing of determination (S20) of whether or not the state at the time of occurrence of the power-off is interrupt permission is executed. Then, if the interruption at the time of the power is interrupted (S20: NO), the flag register is restored (S21), and the control process is interrupted based on the restart index information set in the stack pointer. Revert to the processing of the address to be returned before the occurrence. On the other hand, if the power is turned off is in the interrupt enabled state (S20: YES), the flag register is restored (S22), and then the interrupt enable setting (S23) is performed and then the stack pointer is set. Based on the restart index information, the control process is returned to the process to be returned before the occurrence of the power failure.

In this case, the flag register is restored separately from the other registers because the flag register stores game state information such as a definite change, etc., and as long as recovery of these information is possible, the power is turned off from the control processing. It is done just before returning to before occurrence of
<< Process at initialization of RWM >>

  In the process at the time of initialization of RWM (S24 to S28), after clearing the RWM area (S24), the initialization of RWM (S25), initialization of the effect indicator (effect display device 60) (S26), and The timer setting for the game progress interruption (S27) is performed. Among them, clear data (00H) is set in all RWM areas in the process of clear RWM area (S24) to initial setting of RWM (S25), and clear data is stored as a reference value of relative address, and this reference value Is +1. Furthermore, bit 7 of this reference value is examined and a determination of the examination result is carried out. In the process of determining the inspection result, if the inspection result is 0, the process returns to the processing of storing the above-mentioned clear data in the reference value, and the address of the initialization data setting table is set. Thereby, the initial value of RWM is set. In addition, clearing of the RWM area is not limited to the one that is performed for the entire area, and for example, only a partial area where specific information is stored or an area excluding an unused area may be cleared. It is also good.

  As in the case of "00H" which is the value of the clear data described above, "H" described at the end of the numerical value represents that the numerical value is represented in hexadecimal. Further, in the present embodiment, the numerical value representing a hexadecimal number is attached with the symbol “H”, the numerical value representing a binary number is attached with the symbol “B”, and symbols representing such notations are attached. It is assumed that numbers that are not included are in decimal.

In the initialization of the effect display (S26), in order to perform the command transmission request of initialization of the effect display device 60, the error state and the fraud prize ball monitoring information, the command request data setting with the address of the effect initial command setting table as an argument Execute the process
<< Processing of time setting for game progress interrupt >>

In the process of clock setting for the game progress interrupt (S27), in order to start the game progress interrupt, the count value of the predetermined size is set in the corresponding counter setting register, and the game progress interrupt is generated every 4 ms, for example. .
<< Circulation processing >>

  After the clock setting for the game progress interrupt (S27), it prepares recursion (restart) of a predetermined timer which is interrupt processing time monitoring means and updates the random number related value used for generating the initial value of various random numbers The circulation process (S32 (S28 to S31)) is performed. In this circulation process (S32 (S28 to S31)), in order to manage the gaming machine, first, an interrupt is prohibited (S28). Furthermore, in order to prepare for the interruption processing time monitoring means to recurse, a predetermined value to be the first recursion information is set in the interruption processing time monitoring means clear register (S29). This first recursive information is a predetermined value such as 55H.

  Then, the initial value random number updating process is executed (S30), and the initial value random number per symbol, the special symbol initial value random number per symbol, and the software initial value random number per special symbol are updated. After this, after permitting the interrupt (S31), the process returns to the process of interrupt prohibition (S28) again, and the subsequent processes (S28 to S31) are sequentially repeated to circulate the control process.

The above-mentioned game progress interrupt is possible every time interrupt permission (S28) is executed, and the game progress interrupt process is repeated every predetermined cycle (here, 4 ms cycle) based on the cycle information set in S27. .
<< initial value random number update processing >>

In the above-described initial value random number update process (S30), the random number is updated from the initial value random number update table in order to update the initial value random number per normal symbol, the symbol initial value random number per special symbol, and the software initial value random number per special symbol. Acquire the number of times, and update the initial value random number for the number of updates.
<Game progress interrupt processing>

  Next, a game progress interrupt process repeated in a 4 ms cycle based on the cycle information set in the process of setting the time for game progress interrupt (S27) will be described. As shown in FIG. 13, in the game progress interrupt process, setting of the interrupt operation condition (S41, S42), recursion of the interrupt processing time monitoring means (S43), management of the gaming machine (S45 to S70), permission of the interrupt (S41-S70) S71) is sequentially performed to return to the processing before the occurrence of the game progress interrupt.

  Specifically, in the process of setting the interrupt operation condition (S41, S42), in order to clear the interrupt flag, the interrupt operation condition setting value is stored in the game progress interrupt control register (S41), and the interrupt operation condition setting is performed. The value is set in the control register corresponding to the predetermined input terminal (S42). Thereafter, the second recursion information is set (S43), and the second recursion information is set in the interrupt processing time monitoring means register (S44).

  In the management of gaming machines (S45 to S70), in order to manage gaming machines, the following processing is sequentially executed.

First, in order to monitor the input of a specific signal, an input process (S45) is performed. The targets of monitoring here are various switches attached to the game board, a tray full switch, an open signal, a magnetic detection signal, a radio wave detection signal, a glass non-detection signal, and a disconnection short-circuit power supply abnormality detection signal It is.

  Subsequently, various random number updating processes (S46) are executed to update the normal symbol variation pattern random number and the variation pattern random number. Furthermore, the initial value update type random number updating process (S47) is executed to update the random number per normal symbol, the symbol random number per special symbol, and the soft random number per special symbol. Next, an initial value random number update process (S48) is executed to update the initial value random number per symbol, the symbol initial value random number per special symbol, and the software initial value random number per special symbol. Also, in order to update the 2-byte timer, the timer subtraction process (S49) is executed, and in order to set the effective period of the second starting winning opening 63, the effective period setting process of the second starting opening (S50) is performed. .

  Further, the prize monitoring process (S51) is executed to store the number of times the prize balls are paid out, create an output request for the board external information, and send a command to be transmitted to the sub substrate 104. Subsequently, in order to control the payout control board 103, a winning ball control process (S52) is performed.

  Next, when the game ball passes the normal symbol operating gate (operating ports 68a and 68b), the normal symbol operating gate monitoring process (S53) is executed to store the random number related to the normal symbol, and the normal symbol display device or The normal symbol control process (S54) is executed in order to perform the process relating to the normal symbol electric combination. Furthermore, in order to monitor the start of fluctuation of the normal symbol, the normal symbol fluctuation start monitoring process (S55) is executed. Also, in order to monitor the winning of the first starting winning opening 62 and the second starting winning opening 63 of the gaming ball, the starting opening monitoring control process (S56) is executed, and the first special symbol display portion 70 or the second special symbol In order to perform processing concerning display 71, special symbol control processing (S57) is executed. Then, in order to perform processing concerning the special electric combination, the special electric combination control processing (S58) is executed, and in order to perform processing concerning the effective period of the first large winning opening 91 or the second large winning opening 92, The special winning opening valid period setting process (S59) is executed, and the special symbol variation start monitoring control process (S60) is executed to monitor the variation start of the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

  Next, execute anomaly detection processing (S61) to monitor magnetism, disconnection / short circuit / power supply, radio waves, monitor the open / close state of the glass frame set / game board frame, and monitor the pair glass. In order to detect the entrance passage passing time abnormality, the entrance passage passing time abnormality detection processing (S62) is executed. In addition, the game state display process (S63) to request display of the number of times the special electric character works continuously, an error state, the number of operation suspension balls of the normal symbol display device, and the number of operation suspension balls of the special symbol display device To monitor the touch state (including the state of the operation amount) of the emission handle 20, the steering wheel state signal inspection process (S64) is performed. In addition, the display of special symbols, the display of normal symbols, the display of the number of operation suspension balls of special symbol display devices (70, 71), the display of the number of operation suspension balls of normal symbol display devices, the display of gaming state, the special electric role goods The LED output process (S65) is executed to display the number of times the camera is operated continuously and the error display.

  Subsequently, in order to output the signal of prohibition / permission of the launch of the game ball, launch control signal output processing (S66) is executed, and in order to create and output a signal to be output to the test apparatus, test signal output processing (S67) Run. Furthermore, in order to output the output data of the normal motorized combination product solenoid, the first large winning opening open solenoid, and the second large winning opening open solenoid, to execute the solenoid output processing (S68), to transmit the effect control command The external information output process (S70) is executed to execute the effect control command transmission process (S69) and output a signal to the external terminal (various external output terminals of the external relay terminal board 46 (see FIG. 2)).

After that, the interrupt permission (S71) is executed, and the control process returns to RET. And the above-mentioned circulation processing (S32 (S28-S31)) of control start processing is performed using the remaining time until next game interruption is performed.
<< production control command transmission processing >>

  In the effect control command transmission process (S69), the transmission request of the command to be transmitted to the effect control board is checked, and if it is determined that the transmission request is made, the command data to be requested is acquired and the used command buffer is cleared. Acquisition of MODE data corresponding to acquired command data, output of MODE data, retention of MODE data, acquisition of EVENT data corresponding to acquired command data, output of EVENT data are sequentially performed. The transmission timing of the command data is defined by the effect data strobe, and a predetermined time (here, 46 μs or more) after the on time (here, 2 μs or more) of the effect data strobe signal is the effect data holding time.

  In the inspection of the command transmission request, the value of the command request writing position (area) is compared with the value of the command request reading position (area), and if the values do not match, it is determined that there is a command transmission request. In acquiring the command data to be requested, the address calculation value stored in the command request reading position and the double value of the logical product of the position correction bit data are added and the address of the command buffer is added. As command data. The command request reading position is incremented by one in order to update the contents of the reading position of the command data after acquiring the address calculation value stored in the command request reading position. When clearing the command buffer, the command buffer in which the acquired command data is stored is cleared to 0 in order to clear the command buffer.

In the acquisition of MODE data corresponding to acquired command data, the upper part of the acquired command data is set as MODE data. In the output of the MODE data, after the acquired MODE data is output to the effect command output port, in order to output the effect data strobe, strobe output processing is executed. In holding the MODE data, it waits for a predetermined time (here, 46 μs or more) to hold the MODE data. When acquiring EVENT data corresponding to acquired command data, the lower part of the acquired command data is taken as EVENT data. In the output of EVENT data, after the acquired EVENT data is output to the same effect command output port as that described above, strobe output processing is executed in order to output an effect data strobe.
<< Control mode related to command transmission timing >>

In this embodiment, the effect control command output from the main substrate 102 to the sub main substrate 301 is temporarily stored in the command buffer by the command request before transmission. The command buffer functions as a ring buffer of a plurality of buffers, and is performed once in the order stored in the command buffer in the control processing for command transmission (here, in the effect control command transmission processing (S69)). In the game progress interrupt process, one command is taken out of the command buffer and transmitted. It is also possible to adopt a method of transmitting a command whose priority is set high first. In addition, in various control processes, when a command that requires transmission is generated, it is also possible to perform command transmission as needed. When such a method is adopted, transmission of effect commands is collectively performed in one control processing module such as, for example, effect control command transmission processing (S69) during one game progress interrupt processing. Instead, command transmission is performed sequentially in each control processing module whenever the need for command transmission arises. Therefore, it is unlikely that the command transmission will be carried over to the next game progress interrupt processing. Then, for example, there is no delay in the command transmission at the start winning combination or the command transmission at the start of variation of the special symbol, and quick command processing becomes possible.
<< Power off process >>

Next, the power-off process performed when the power is shut down will be described. As shown in FIG. 14, in the power-off process, the data of all the used registers is saved in RWM (S81), and the state of interrupt permission / prohibition before power-off is saved (S82). Furthermore, it is judged whether or not the information on power-on normality is stored in the RWM (S83), and if not stored (S83: NO), the information on power-off abnormality is stored in the RWM (S84), The processing moves to the processing of RWM access prohibition (S88). On the other hand, if it is stored (S83: YES), the value of the stack pointer is stored in the stack pointer buffer (S85), the information on power off normal is stored in RWM (S86), and the checksum of RWM is calculated. And save the checksum data (S87). Then, the access to the RWM is inhibited (S88), and control processing is looped while waiting for the reset of the CPU 501.
<< Control mode related to lottery of fluctuation pattern >>

  Then, the various aspects which concern on the lottery of a fluctuation pattern are demonstrated. In the aspect of the determination of the variation pattern described here, one of the pachinko gaming machines 10 may be selected and applied, or may be used in combination as appropriate. And when using a several aspect together, it is possible to use an aspect properly based on elements, such as a result of a pass / fail, for example.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, the determination result of the fluctuation pattern is determined by the number of holding balls, the special symbol (which may be a symbol group), and the fluctuation pattern selection state (status information of the special symbol). Although used as an element, a variation pattern corresponding to a combination of these determinants is selected. Then, with the determination of the fluctuation pattern, the fluctuation time paired with the fluctuation pattern is determined. Furthermore, in the present embodiment, with regard to the determination of the fluctuation pattern, the elements of the determination are made to differ depending on whether the result of the success or failure lottery is a big hit or a loss. That is, in the case of a big hit, a variation pattern is selected from among those linked to the effect state (status information of special symbol, etc.), a special symbol group, and a random number of success or failure. On the other hand, in the case of a loss, a fluctuation pattern is selected from among those linked to these based on the effect state, the number of holding balls, and the random number. Among them, in the case of a big hit, the fluctuation pattern to which the time of re-lottery on presentation is given is based on the state of presentation (presence or absence of specific effects etc.) and the special symbol group, The presence or absence is determined, and the determined result is transmitted from the main substrate 102 to the sub main substrate 301.

  In addition, when determining the fluctuation pattern and the fluctuation time, it is possible to determine the subsequent fluctuation time according to the determined effect pattern number (in other words, the contents of the effect pattern). For example, when the selected fluctuation pattern corresponds to the limited frequency pattern rendition, it is conceivable to determine the extension of the fluctuation time according to that afterward.

  In addition, by setting the command of variation additional information as a command at the start of symbol variation of the special symbol as described above, during the variation time previously determined in relation to elements such as gaming state and hit symbol, A presentation such as a notice can be added. Then, in the case of determining the overall fluctuation time in such an aspect, it is possible to create various fluctuation patterns while suppressing the number of fluctuation patterns provided in advance as small as described below. That is, considering the case of performing the above-mentioned pseudo continuous advance notice (so-called “pseudo chain”), when the pseudo run variable patterns are simply set individually, the same number of fluctuation patterns as the number of types of effects are provided in advance. You need to When the effect patterns are all prepared individually in this manner, the total number of variation patterns may be large, for example, to reach a number that exceeds 256. For this reason, in order to provide an identifiable code to a large number of fluctuation patterns, it is necessary to increase the number of bits and the number of bytes for representing the code as compared with the conventional case.

  However, by using the fluctuation addition information (variation addition pattern), it is possible to connect fluctuation addition information, for example, selected by random numbers to a relatively small number of basic fluctuation patterns, and form a fluctuation pattern afterward. It is. And since a new fluctuation pattern can be formed by the combination of a fluctuation pattern by this, various fluctuation patterns can be created, without making the number of the fluctuation patterns beforehand provided excessive. In addition, it is possible to transmit the random number value according to the fluctuation additional information from the main board 102 to the sub main board 301 at the occurrence of the start winning as a command for pre-reading effect. In addition, it is also possible to set the appearance probability of the variation addition pattern so that the variation addition information is easily added when the limited frequency pattern effect is performed. In addition, if “777” which is a probability variation symbol is displayed from the beginning as a combination of rendering symbols 190, setting of variation additional information is not performed as a combination of rendering symbols 190, if an example using variation additional information is further mentioned. Once the non-deterministic symbol "666" is displayed, the effect of displaying whether the result is promoted to "777" or not (for example, the effect of the swing fluctuation or the development of the fluctuation mode There is a case where the effect to be expressed) is performed by setting the fluctuation additional information.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the fluctuation pattern is determined with the number of holding balls as an element, and the fluctuation pattern table to be referred to differs depending on how many the holding balls are. The fluctuation pattern table is provided corresponding to the number 0 to 4 of holding balls. The reason that the fluctuation pattern table corresponding to the hold 4 is provided as well as the four hold 0 to 3 is as follows. For example, consider a case where a new variable display is started from the situation where the number of balls held is four and the number of balls held is three. The state where the number of holding balls is 3 at the stage where the control process is not yet determined the fluctuation pattern which is the process during the later game progress interrupt process during the game progress interrupt process being executed at that time When a new start winning combination occurs, the number of holding balls is added to 4 when determining the fluctuation pattern. Therefore, the fluctuation pattern table is provided corresponding to the number of holding balls 0 to 4 so that such a situation can also be a factor in determining the fluctuation pattern.

Moreover, it is possible to set it as the time of fluctuation pattern lottery as acquisition timing of a fluctuation pattern random number. That is, since the variation pattern random number is not a random number relating to the special product operation such as the special electric role, etc., for example, in aiming at a fair game as an element for playing a game properly The need for constraints is reduced. Therefore, it is conceivable that the fluctuation pattern random number is acquired and stored, for example, as a separately provided timing at the time of the fluctuation pattern lottery as the timing separately provided at the start winning combination. By doing this, it is possible to reduce the number of information to be stored at the start winning combination, and it is possible to reduce the capacity of the program and memory.
<< Control mode related to designation of design >>

In the lottery of symbols, determine the symbol determination table to be used based on the value of the upper byte of the symbol indicating the symbol random number, and then determine the symbol from the determined symbol determination table based on the value of the lower byte of the symbol random number Is also possible. In this embodiment, since the numerical value range of the symbol random number is set to "0 to 999", binary code codes of these numerical values can be used. And, by doing this, it is possible to reduce the memory and program capacity. In addition, distribution of the game state such as the number of rounds and the number of time reductions is performed on the winning symbol (which may be a symbol group), and the number of subsequent rounds and the number of time shortening are determined according to the winning symbol. May be By doing this, it is not necessary to store and control data specific to the gaming state, and the memory and program capacity can be reduced. Further, information (playing state designation information) for transmitting the gaming state to a command (for example, each command of the design 1 effect pattern and the design 2 effect pattern in the present embodiment) per hit from the main substrate 102 to the sub main substrate 301 It is also possible to add). This command is not sent to the sub main substrate 301 immediately after being created, but is created and temporarily stored, and sent to the sub main substrate 301 after waiting for a predetermined timing.
<Main control processing of sub board>

Next, main control processing of the sub-substrate 104 described above will be described. Here, as main control processing, various interrupt processing which is exception processing and processing related to these will be described based on FIGS.
<< Interrupt factor and priority level >>

  First, in the present embodiment, in the sub main board 301 which constitutes the sub board 104, the CPU 521 applies a predetermined signal (reset signal) to the reset terminal provided in the CPU 521 as an interrupt factor (source of cause generation) which gives top priority. There are input and occurrence of various abnormalities. Among these, the reset signal is input when the power is turned on, when an external reset is performed, when the watchdog timer times out, etc., and sub main initialization processing described later with the input of the reset signal. (See FIG. 15) is executed.

  On the other hand, the interruption at the time of occurrence of various abnormalities is executed depending on whether or not the function (watchdog function) of the watchdog timer is set to be effective. That is, if the watchdog function is enabled, the processing of the CPU 521 shifts, for example, to a predetermined infinite loop so that the processing time exceeds the set time of the watchdog timer when a predetermined abnormality that becomes a target occurs. Do. When a runaway is detected due to a timeout in the watchdog function, a submain initialization process (see FIG. 15) described later is executed. Then, when the various abnormalities described above and the input of the reset signal occur at the same time, the reset by the input of the reset signal (sub main initialization process) is prioritized.

  Another interrupt generation factor in the sub main board 301 is reception of a command (main command) from the main board 102. The fact that the command from the main board 102 is being received is determined by detecting the rise of the aforementioned strobe signal (effect data strobe signal) from the main board 102. When the main command reception interrupt occurs, a main command reception process (see FIG. 17) described later is executed. In the case of normal reception where the command can be received without any problem in the main command reception process, the content of the received command is stored in the command buffer (command ring buffer), and the command analysis process is the main process described later (FIG. 16). (See cyclic processing of S124 to S132). The priority level of the main command reception interrupt is set to the next highest level 7 above.

  In addition, when the above-mentioned watchdog function is set to be effective, as in the case of the occurrence of various abnormalities described above, an interrupt is detected when runaway detection is performed for the CPU 521 without passing through processing to intentionally time out. A (runaway detection interrupt) occurs, and a sub main initial setting process (see FIG. 15) described later is executed. The priority level of such a normal watchdog timer interrupt is level 3 which is four steps lower than level 7 described above. In the present embodiment, interrupts of levels 4 to 6 between level 3 and level 7 described above are not executed.

  Also, another interrupt generation factor is transmission and reception with the sub-sub substrate 302. The interrupt related to transmission / reception with the sub-sub substrate 302 (sub-sub command reception interrupt) occurs when a reception command (sub-sub command) from the sub-sub substrate 302 is input. When the sub-sub substrate 302 receives a command (sub-main command) from the sub-main substrate 301, the receive command from the sub-sub-substrate 302 transmits the fact that the command has been normally received to the sub-main substrate 301. Then, when an interrupt related to transmission / reception with the sub-sub substrate 302 occurs, command transmission / reception management processing is executed. The command transmission from the sub main substrate 301 to the sub sub substrate 302 is performed when the monitoring toggle signal from the sub sub substrate 302 is normally sent, as described later. The priority of interrupts related to transmission and reception with this sub-sub-substrate 302 is level 2.

  Also, there is communication with the sub-sub substrate 302 as another interrupt generation factor. An interrupt (sub-sub communication interrupt) related to communication with the sub-sub substrate 302 is generated every predetermined cycle (500 μs in this embodiment) as described later. Then, when an interrupt related to communication with the sub-sub substrate 302 occurs, communication processing with the sub-sub substrate is executed. The priority of the interrupt related to the communication with the sub sub substrate 302 is level 2 same as the interrupt related to the transmission and reception with the sub sub substrate 302 described above.

Furthermore, other interrupt generation factors include communication with an RTC clock (real time clock), generation of a timer interrupt (sub main timer interrupt), interrupt requests of various lamps, etc. These priorities are at the lowest level. It is set to 1. Among these, at the time of interruption related to communication with the RTC clock, communication processing with the RTC clock is executed. Further, the above-described timer interrupt is for use in general game effects such as solenoid output processing, motor output processing, game timer management processing, and the like. The activation of the timer interrupt is immediately performed by setting at initialization (initial setting), and the timer interrupt is repeated every predetermined period (about 1 ms in this embodiment). When a timer interrupt occurs, a timer interrupt process (see FIG. 18) described later is executed.
<< Sub main initial setting process >>

  As in the case where the power of the pachinko gaming machine 10 is turned on, when the power of the sub main substrate 301 is turned on, a sub main initial setting process shown in FIG. 15 is executed. In this sub-main initialization process, first, a predetermined address is set as a stack pointer (S101), and then all interrupts are inhibited until various initializations are completed (S102). Furthermore, in the hardware initialization process (S103), basic settings (register settings, port initialization, etc.) regarding hardware are performed, and in the RWM initialization process (S104), the RWM initialization is performed according to a predetermined condition. Is done. Then, in this RWM initialization, the initial value is prepared for the variable with initial value, and 0 is cleared for the variable without initial value. Further, in the RWM initialization process (S104), ROM data (control program etc.) is expanded to the RWM.

  Furthermore, in S105, interrupts other than the reception of the main command are inhibited, and subsequently, a power failure recovery error detection process (S106) for setting various error information is executed. In the power failure return error detection process (S106), a process according to the circumstances such as the game nature is performed. That is, the sub main board 301 is provided with a function to cope with various errors including vibration errors and radio wave errors. However, the function for coping with these various errors is previously selected, and the function of error detection is exhibited only for the errors that have been validated. For example, whether or not a predetermined hit is generated when the game ball passes a specific area, such as one type and two types combining so-called one type and two types of game characteristics, and so-called ball tight specs, etc. The vibration error detection function is effective in the model in which is determined. However, as in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment, in the type of machine in which the acceptance lottery is performed only by random number lottery, even if it has the vibration error detection function, that function is selectively invalidated in advance. There are no special measures for vibration errors etc.

  Subsequently, in the all lamp extinguishing process (S107), an extinguishing request is performed to perform all the lamp extinguishing, and in the watchdog timer operation start process (S108), the watchdog timer is used as a watchdog timer. The watchdog timer is started. In FIG. 15, the main processing (S109) is connected to the processing from S101 to S108, but the processing from S101 to S108 is the sub main initial setting processing, and the main processing (S109) Is performed subsequently to the sub main initialization process (S101 to S108). Furthermore, in the main processing (S109), management of the main processing of the game is performed, and the details of the main processing (S109) will be described later.

A sleep process (S110) is arranged after the main process (S109). Normally, since the main process (S109) does not return to the reset operation for performing the sub main initialization process, the sleep process (S110) is not executed, but as indicated by the broken arrow in the figure, When the sleep processing (S110) is to be executed due to some cause, transition to the low power consumption mode is performed.
<< Main processing on sub main board >>

  In the above-mentioned main process (S109), as shown in FIG. 16, RWM arrangement address acquisition process (S121) is executed, and in this RWM arrangement address acquisition process (S121), the program area expanded in RWM is checked. As can be done, acquisition of the start address of the expanded program area is performed.

  Next, all interrupts are permitted in order to enable interrupts in the subsequent processing (S122). Furthermore, in the device initialization process (S123), the initialization operation of various devices such as motors, solenoids, and lamps is performed. In the subsequent watchdog clear processing (S124), if the setting for using the watchdog timer is made, the watchdog timer is cleared. Furthermore, in the symbol updating process (S125), the out-of-out symbols pertaining to the effect symbols 190a to 190c are determined by the counter.

  As a counter used here, a 3-digit counter from "111" to "999" can be illustrated, and, for example, when the acquired counter value is "757", the effect pattern 190a ~ to be stopped and displayed It is possible to make 190 be "757". If the acquired counter value is a combination of just like "111", for example, it is possible to offset the numerical value of a predetermined digit like "121" and make it a combination of outliers.

  The symbol updating process (S125) may not be executed depending on the adopted determination method of the missing symbol. For example, it is not executed when lottery symbols are determined by lottery, and as a concrete thing, it has data of lottery sheet (lottery table) incorporating all symbol combinations, and it is possible to use the lottery sheet for losing symbols It is possible to illustrate the control manner which is decided.

  In the subsequent error presentation management process (S126), an error state is monitored, and various error notifications are executed according to the monitoring result. Further, the push button monitoring control process (S127) is for control relating to the above-mentioned operation button 22 which is the sub-button for effect (push button), and corresponds to the input state (operation state) of the operation button 22. Execute the process

  Next, in the notice lottery management process (S128), a lottery for determining the notice effect is executed. However, the lottery of the notice effect is an efficiency (main loop process) of loop processing described later in the main process (S109). In order to increase efficiency), it is divided into several times. That is, when a plurality of preliminary announcement effects are performed during one change, the lottery process for the plurality of preliminary announcement effects is not all performed in one main loop, but a plurality of main loops are performed. It is executed after a plurality of lottery divided into two. Further, the timing of the lottery is related to the timing of the advance notice effect appearing during the change. For example, with regard to notice effects that appear relatively early, such as immediately after the start of fluctuation, the priority of the lottery time is set high, and image control can be performed as early as possible by performing the lottery according to the priority. It is possible to send a command to the sub sub substrate 302 which is the side. Note that various processes performed in the advance lottery management process (S128) will be described later.

  Next, in the device management process (S129), when there is a device operation request such as a real time clock (RTC), a lamp, a motor, a solenoid, and a lamp, a process for operating the corresponding device is executed. .

  Furthermore, in the command analysis process (S130), it is necessary to start the process for responding to the command (main command) received from the main board 102, or when command data exists in the above-mentioned command buffer, the command analysis is performed. Do. When the command is analyzed (S131: YES), the process returns to the watchdog clear process (S124), and the main loop is executed. Immediately after the command is received from the main board 102, since the command buffer has command data, the main loop is executed, and the process returns to the watchdog clear process (S124) and thereafter. However, if the command buffer becomes empty while the main loop is repeated and the next timer interrupt described later is executed, it is not necessary to analyze the command, and the command analysis will not be performed. In such a case, the process does not advance to the main loop (S131: NO), and using the generated time, random number update processing (S132) having lower priority than command analysis is executed. This random number update process (S132) is a soft random number update process. Further, in this command analysis process (S130), the variation pattern (sub variation pattern) in the sub main substrate 301 is determined. In addition, when data of lottery sheet (lottery table) incorporating all symbol combinations is adopted and the control mode is adopted to determine the outlying symbol using the lottery sheet, the command analysis process (S130) is performed by the command analysis process Determine the design.

  Regarding the processing (S130, S131) related to these command analysis, in other words, with respect to a certain command, immediately after receiving the command, the processing arranged in the following (here, random number update processing (S132)) is not performed The other processing (S124 to S131) in the loop processing (S124 to S132) is repeated, and if there is no command in the command buffer, the processing proceeds to the processing arranged thereafter, and as a result, command analysis processing for a certain main command Since command analysis is executed immediately after the start of (S130), the program module placed later does not advance, and if command analysis is not performed in the command analysis process (S130), the program module placed later is It can be said that it is something to go forward. In addition, when processing, such as calculation of a checksum, is performed after the determination processing (S131) of whether or not the command has been analyzed, similarly to the random number update processing (S132), this processing is executed immediately after receiving the command. It can be said that the process is not

In the random number updating process (S132), the lottery random number (software random number) related to the effect is updated, and the software random number related to the sub main substrate 301 has a new value every time this random number updating process (S132) is executed. Updated to Then, the value sequentially updated in the random number update process (S132) is used as a random number for the lottery of various presentation modes in the above-mentioned advance notice lottery management process (S128) or the like. Furthermore, the value generated in the random number updating process (S132) is processed for drawing for the lottery through the calculation with hardware random numbers for lottery of various presentation modes as in the generation of the predetermined random number in the main substrate 102 described above. It is also used as a random number of
<< Main command reception process >>

  Next, main command reception processing from the main board 102 will be described based on FIG. First, it is judged whether or not the command input value is decided (S141). As for command input, there is a risk of reading failure due to noise or the like, so the input value is not determined until the same value is read in two consecutive times. Specifically, the command data is read up to five times, and when the same value is read two consecutive times, processing is performed to determine the input value. Then, if the command input value is not determined (S141: NO), the main command reception process is exited and the process returns to the original process before the occurrence of the interrupt.

  If the command input value is determined (S141: YES), it is determined whether the received command is the first command (S142), and it is determined according to the determination result whether it is the first command or the second command. Processing branches. The main board 102 transmits a 1-byte command in one command transmission, but since the command from the main board 102 has a 2-byte configuration of MODE data and EVENT data, as described above, the command transmission is performed twice. is necessary. Therefore, from the main board 102, the upper byte command (MODE command) is transmitted for the first time, and the lower byte command (EVENT command) is transmitted for the second time. Then, in the sub main board 301 having received the command, if the most significant bit of the command data is "1", it is determined as the first command (MODE command), and if the most significant bit is "0", the second command Judge as (EVENT command).

  If the received command is the first command (S142: YES), the first command is temporarily stored (S148) and stored. Here, temporary is a storage area for temporarily saving a value.

  Furthermore, the current value of hard random number 1, which is a predetermined hardware random number, is latched and held in a buffer on software (S149), and then the process exits this main command reception process and returns to before an interrupt occurs. . Here, as in S149, the hard random number 1 is latched each time a command (first command) of the main board 102 is received, in order to prevent a cycle of random numbers from being formed. That is, a random number excluding periodicity by creating a numerical value using reception of the first command generated at random timing, and using the numerical value at that time at a predetermined lottery timing for presentation, etc. Acquisition is possible.

  The hardware random numbers are generated using a high-speed counter, but some periodicity may occur if the acquisition timing is not random. However, since the first command from the main board 102 is received by the sub main board 301 at irregular timing caused by winning of a game ball or the like, there is little possibility that a cycle will occur. Therefore, in the sub main board 301, hardware random numbers are generated by using the reception of the command as described above, and the periodicity as performed in the main board 102 is eliminated.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S142 that the received command is not the first command (S142: NO), it means that the second command has been received. When the second command is received, it is checked whether the first command has been received (S143). If the first command has not been received (S143: NO), the main command reception process is exited and the process returns to the original process.

  If the first command has been received (S143: YES), acquisition of the command write pointer is performed (S144). Here, the command write pointer indicates the reading position in the command ring buffer, and acquisition of the command write pointer is acquisition of data from the reading position indicated by the command write pointer.

  Furthermore, the first and second commands normally received at this time are stored in the command ring buffer for analysis processing (S145). The stored data is analyzed in the command analysis process (S130) of the above-described main process (see FIG. 16). Then, the command write pointer is updated (S146), and the aforementioned temporary first command is cleared (S147). Here, the update of the command write pointer is a process of updating one reading position of the command ring buffer. Further, the process of clearing the temporary first command is to clear the first command stored in S148.

In the present embodiment, the set of two element commands (first command and second command) is one set (one set), and the hard random number 1 is latched in response to the reception of the first command. The latch process can be performed by a processing system (system of S148 and S149) different from the system of the process (S143 to S147) after the reception of the second command, and the process after the reception of the second command can be ended quickly.
<< Sub main timer interrupt processing >>

  Next, timer interrupt processing will be described based on FIG. The timer interrupt process occurs every 1 ms which is a predetermined cycle. Since this timer interrupt process is a level 1 interrupt process with the lowest priority, as shown in the figure, an interrupt with a priority level 2 or higher is first permitted (S161). Furthermore, port input processing (S162) is executed, and port data input processing and output processing are performed. In this port input process (S162), a process (input process) for confirming a port connected to various sensors (magnetic sensor, vibration sensor, etc.) and various devices (motor, solenoid, lamp, etc.) Information output from the port (output process) is being performed.

  Also, in the port input process (S162), other than these ports, a process related to a power supply voltage monitoring port to which a signal (power failure signal) indicating power failure at power failure is input is also performed. . Then, when the power-off signal is input, the processing of the CPU 521 prohibits all interrupt processing, and shifts to transfer processing for backing up the stored information. The backup function of the sub main board 301 will be described later.

  Subsequently, device control data output processing (S163) is executed, and device control data output for driving various motors, solenoids, lamps and the like is performed. For example, in the device management process (S129) of the main process shown in FIG. 16, when a drive control pattern of performing demagnetization for 100 ms after excitation for 100 ms for a predetermined motor is determined, this device In the control data output process (S163), a count process of 100 ms is performed.

  Furthermore, the effect timer update process (S164) is executed, and the process of updating the timer value (S165) for measuring a predetermined timing in various effects is performed. Then, the button control timer is updated, and the effective time management timer for managing the period in which the operation of the push button (operation button 22) is effective is updated.

  Next, the task control counter is updated (S166), and the control counter (multitask counter) used for a plurality of predetermined tasks is updated. The control counter updates the count value once every 1 ms, which is a timer interrupt cycle, with 16 times as one unit. Then, in the present embodiment, the task control counter counts the values of 0 to 15 in order every 1 ms, and loops the count of the values of 0 to 15.

  Further, as one of the predetermined tasks, one relating to the game effect lamp can be exemplified. Many of the driving modes of the game effect lamp are performed in synchronization with the image on the effect display device 60, and switching of display of one frame (one image frame of one unit) of the moving image is about 16 ms or about 32 ms (about 33 ms) In many cases (in this embodiment, 16 ms cycle). For this reason, the control counter is designed such that the generation cycle of the control counter related to the game effect lamp forms a relationship such as an integral multiple or an integral fraction with the control unit time (16 ms or 32 ms) in the moving image display. ing. As a result, it becomes easy to design a lamp effect matching the image and the timing.

  Further, regarding the control counter, for example, if certain processing related to the gaming effect lamp is performed at intervals of 16 ms, the processing is performed at the timing when the value of the control counter becomes one predetermined value such as 3 . Also, for processing performed at intervals of 8 ms, such as the image CPU runaway monitoring processing described later, the processing is performed at two timings with a difference of 8 as in the case where the control counter is 1 or 9. To be done.

  In addition, when the cycle generated by the control counter is adjusted to a relatively short cycle, such as one cycle (1 ms) of a timer interrupt (sub main timer interrupt), for example, about 30 seconds like control of error notification etc. When performing control to count a relatively long time, the data length to be secured to count 30 seconds becomes long, and the number of memories required also becomes large. Therefore, the cycle of the control counter is set to be longer than one cycle (1 ms) of the timer interrupt, and the relationship between the control cycle related to another effect (image effect) to be superimposed and the integral multiple or the integer fraction The cycle in which the control counter makes a round is set to a predetermined cycle (here, 16 ms). As another application of the control counter updated in the process of updating the task control counter (S166), there is runaway monitoring (described later) for the sub-sub substrate 302.

  Next, the image CPU runaway monitoring process (S167) is executed, and the runaway monitoring process on the image CPU of the sub-sub substrate 302 is performed. Here, in the present embodiment, the CPU of the sub-sub substrate 302 is integrated with the image controller 526 in FIG. As described above, the sub-sub substrate 302 outputs a predetermined signal (monitoring toggle signal) that is repeatedly turned on and off every display of one frame of moving image control. If the toggle signal from this sub-sub substrate 302 does not change continuously for a predetermined period (for example, 1600 ms corresponding to about 50 to 100 frames), it is determined that an abnormality such as a runaway of the image CPU has occurred. A reset signal (external reset signal) is transmitted from main substrate 301 to sub-sub substrate 302. After receiving the reset signal, the sub-sub substrate 302 executes reset processing (sub-main initialization processing) for state initialization of the sub-sub substrate 302.

  The monitoring of the toggle signal as described above is performed once for every eight timer interrupts (8 ms), as described later. Further, the control counter described above is used to determine that the monitoring period has arrived. Here, the monitoring period is set to 8 ms because monitoring is always performed at a cycle shorter than the display period (16 ms or 32 ms) related to one frame of the image. It is to be done. Furthermore, as another reason for setting the monitoring cycle to 8 ms, it is possible to use the update timing of the control counter by setting the monitoring cycle to an integer fraction of the cycle generated by the control counter. is there.

Following the image CPU runaway monitoring process (S167), an error management timer process (S168) is executed. In the error management timer process (S168), the error management timer is decremented, and a predetermined process is executed at time out. As a process at the time of timeout, the process etc. which complete | finish the above-mentioned error alerting | reporting can be mentioned. The error management timer counts one time per 16 timer interrupts, and the process related to error management using the error management timer is also performed among the predetermined tasks using the control counter described above. It is one. When this error management timer process is finished, the process returns to the original process before the timer interrupt in the main process of the sub main (see FIG. 16). Here, since the target of interrupt permission is restricted in the above-described S161, although illustration is omitted, after all interrupts are permitted, the process is returned to the main processing of the sub main.
<< Communication processing with sub sub board >>

Next, communication processing with the above-described sub-sub substrate 302 will be described. The command transmission (sub main command transmission) from sub main substrate 301 to sub sub substrate 302 generates an interrupt (sub communication interrupt) related to communication with sub sub substrate 302 at regular intervals (here, 500 μs), and This is done by executing communication processing with the sub-sub substrate 302 each time. In the communication processing with this sub-sub substrate 302, buffer checks are sequentially performed to confirm the presence of data to be transmitted, and if there is data, this data is read. Then, the read data is set in the transmission buffer, the setting related to the command transmission is updated, and the communication processing with the sub-sub ends.
<< command transmission / reception management process >>

Further, when the sub main board 301 transmits a command to the sub sub board 302, the above-mentioned reception command (sub sub command) indicating that the command (sub main command) has been successfully received from the sub sub board 302 side is the sub main It is transmitted to the substrate 301 side. In this command transmission / reception management process, the command is read, and after the command analysis is executed, the command is saved. In receiving a subsub command, command reception interrupt processing is executed in sub sub substrate 302, and in this command reception interrupt processing, a flag for executing command reception interrupt processing is set within the above-described sub communication interrupt. Is executed by That is, since the input of the sub-sub command from the sub-sub substrate 302 occurs after the transmission of the sub main command from the sub main substrate 301, the command reception interrupt process is incidental to the process related to the sub communication interrupt. It is something to be
<< Control processing on sub-sub board >>

In the sub-sub substrate 302, like the sub-main substrate 301, sub-sub initial setting processing started after power on, main processing executed after the sub-sub initial setting processing, and sub sub timer interrupt generated at predetermined intervals for main processing The timer interrupt process executed along with the sub main command reception process, which is an interrupt process occurring with the reception of the sub main command, is executed. Among them, in the sub main command reception process, when the sub main command from the sub main substrate 301 is received, the process of transmitting the above-mentioned reception command (sub sub command) indicating that the sub main command has been successfully received is performed. To be executed.
<Relationship between basic specifications of pachinko gaming machine and effects>

  Next, a basic spec (specification) of the pachinko gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment and an effect combined with the spec will be described. First, the basic specifications described here are an aspect of what is considered to be optimal for application to the techniques described below. In the pachinko gaming machine 10 of this embodiment, the probability that a big hit will occur (big hit probability) is about 1/319 in the normal time and about 1 / 46.8 in the high probability in both the special figure 1 and the special figure 2. (See FIG. 8 (a)). Furthermore, the pachinko gaming machine 10 is a so-called probability changing loop machine in which a probability variation may occur repeatedly with a predetermined probability, and the probability that the probability variation is repeated (probability variation loop probability) is either of It is said to be 65%.

  FIG. 19 shows the outline of the flow of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 10 according to this embodiment by a flowchart (game flow). The game is played based on the normal mode shown in the middle left of FIG. The jackpot probability in this normal mode is determined as the jackpot probability of Special Figure 1, and its value is about 1/319 as described above. Then, the effect pattern executed during the normal mode is also selected from those for the normal mode.

  The big hit that may occur during this normal mode may be the first hit, and in the present embodiment, as the big hit that may occur as the first hit, the first big hit, as shown in the upper row in the middle in FIG. There are three types of second big hit, third big hit. Among these, the first jackpot is named a mission bonus in the present embodiment, and in this first jackpot (mission bonus), only either 5R normal or 5R positive variation occurs. In the present embodiment, the probability of occurrence of 5R probability variation due to the first jackpot (mission bonus) and the probability of occurrence of 5R normal variation are both 35%.

  The above-mentioned second jackpot is named as hyper bonus in this embodiment, and in this second jackpot (hyper bonus), there is a definite variation (here, with the display of a predetermined number of rendering symbols (here, 7 symbols)) Only 15R probability variation occurs, and the occurrence probability is 5%. Furthermore, in the above-mentioned third jackpot, only the probability variation (here, 2R probability variation) in the form of the sudden probability variation (certainty) described later occurs, and the probability of occurrence is 25%. That is, as the first hit, the 5R normal or 5R probability variation of the first big hit (mission bonus) occurs with 70% (= 35% + 35%) probability, and the second big hit (hyper bonus) occurs with 5% probability And the third hit (probability) occurs with a 25% probability. In addition, the first hit probability shown here assumes normal (low probability, non-short time) gaming state, and assumes the distribution probability of the big hit with special symbol 1 (see FIG. 9). ).

  The above-mentioned third big hit (probability) is a so-called pop-out big hit where it is difficult for a player to obtain a pop-out ball, and a special effect that represents the progress of a round is not executed. And, even if the third big hit is a definite variation hit, special effects pertaining to the progression of the round is not executed, the special game ends in a relatively short time, and it shifts to the game in the definite variation state .

  If the above-mentioned first big hit (mission bonus) is a definite hit, and if the second big hit (hyper bonus) or the third big hit (probability) occurs, the special game state (the first game after the special game ends) 1) It becomes a state of a specific game. The first specific gaming state (first rush) is an effect mode which is mainly provided as a so-called sub mode for the game in the special figure 2, and the details will be described later.

  Among the first to third big hits mentioned above, when the first big hit (mission bonus) occurs, during the special game, to clearly indicate whether the big hit is positive or normal Such effects are not performed. That is, when the first big hit (mission bonus) occurs, the effect is executed without performing display or sound output for clearly indicating to the player whether or not it is a probability change hit.

  Furthermore, in the special game production relating to the first hit (mission bonus), the production branches following the story of whether or not the characters etc. succeed in a predetermined mission (meaning such as mission and mission). Then, if the mission is successful, it shifts to the above-mentioned first specific gaming state (first rush) effect, and if it fails, the special zone effect shown in the upper left part of FIG. 19 (special zone effect Transition to). This special zone is a special stage limited to 20 variations, and in the special zone, the above-mentioned limited frequency pattern rendition is performed. Then, if no big hit occurs while the gaming state is in the special zone, as shown in FIG. 19, the mode is shifted (fall) to the above-mentioned normal mode.

  Here, during the special game art pertaining to the first big hit (mission bonus), the number of effects (mission success or failure effect) for asking the player to shift to the first specific game state (first rush) is expected. For example, it may be considered that the number of times is relatively small, such as once.

  In addition, as an effect (round effect) during the special game when the above-mentioned second jackpot (hyper bonus) occurs, for example, a movie (demo movie) relating to the second jackpot (hyper bonus) can be started as a special game It is possible to continuously display from the end to the end. As this demonstration movie, it is conceivable to adopt one created for the pachinko gaming machine 10. In addition, when a movie or a cartoon (comic) is adopted as a story related to the effect, a predetermined scene of a movie or a video obtained by converting a cartoon into image data as the above-mentioned demonstration movie It is also possible to output Furthermore, as a round effect concerning the second big hit (hyper bonus), the transition to the mode corresponding to the positive variation by setting the effect pattern to stop at every second in the fluctuation that becomes the big hit as the predetermined symbol ("7") It is conceivable that the player is not given an effect (mission success or failure effect) for asking the player to expect to shift to the first specific gaming state, since the game is displayed implicitly (or clearly).

  In addition, as the effect during the special game when the third big hit (probability) occurs, to execute what was provided as the effect for the opening and closing of a very short time according to the large winning opening (91, 92) Is possible. Further, as an effect during a special game relating to the third big hit (probability), it is conceivable to execute an effect indicating transition to the first rush.

  If the second big hit (hyper bonus) or the third big hit (probable) occurs as described above, after the end of the special game, the branch of the effect like the first big hit (mission bonus) is not performed, It shifts to the effect of the above-mentioned first specific gaming state (first rush). Such a transition mode of the effect can be said to directly hit the effect of the first specific gaming state (first rush) based on the difference from the effect transition mode such as the first big hit (mission bonus).

  In the present embodiment, the above-described first specific gaming state is named “first rush” as described above (see the upper right part in FIG. 19). Then, in the first rush, the game according to the special figure 2 using the second start winning opening (63) is executed by the right hitting described above. The jackpot probability of the special figure 2 in the positive change state is about 1 / 46.8 in the present embodiment. Furthermore, the first rush continues until the next big hit occurrence. Therefore, the first rush is a game mode in which the specific gaming state continues so-called 100% until the next jackpot is won. Here, the "first rush" may be a name of an effect relating to the first specified gaming state.

  In addition, the variation pattern of the special symbol selected during the first rush is almost the shortest of the variation time (for example, about 0.6 seconds) except in the limited case as described later. ing. Such an extremely short time variation pattern can be referred to as, for example, a variation pattern of “ultrashort variation” or a variation pattern of “extremely short variation”. Further, in the present embodiment, most of the effect patterns selected based on the fluctuation pattern during the first rush are also of extremely short fluctuation time.

  Here, as an aspect of the variation display of the rendering symbol (190) during the first rush, for example, the rendering symbol (190) is made transparent (or semi-transparent) at the start of the variation and the transparency is lowered during the variation As an example, it may be mentioned that the game is stopped as soon as the player clearly sees.

  Furthermore, the jackpot that occurs during the first rush is 15R positive variation, 10R positive variation, 7R positive variation, 10R normal, as expected at the time of design, provided that the player is playing a game based on the special symbol 2 7R normal, 5R normal has become either. And each big hit occurrence probability (big hit distribution probability of special pattern 2), 15R positive variation 45%, 10R positive variation and 7R positive variation both 10%, 10R normal and 7R normal both 5%, 5R normal Is 25% (see FIG. 9b). Here, in the present embodiment, a small hit is not provided for the special figure 2, but the present invention is not limited to this, a small hit may be provided for the special figure 2. Moreover, it is also possible not to provide a small hit in both of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, or to provide a small hit only in the special figure 2.

  The big hit that occurred in the first rush is the fourth big hit, as shown on the lower right in FIG. This fourth jackpot is named as a special bonus in this embodiment, a battle bonus, and various battle effects in which characters fight are performed as effects during a special game related to the fourth jackpot (battle bonus). It is supposed to be run. Here, "battle production" can be regarded as, for example, a wide-range production mode that can be expressed as battle, confrontation, challenge, and the like. Also, since the battle rendition is a rendition method that informs the player of success or failure by "win" or "defeat", it is a kind of mission, and not necessarily only "battle rendition", but as a modification of 1 Depending on the degree of expectation of the probability change, "mission presentation" may be performed at the fourth big hit. For example, in order to increase the winning rate of the player character (protagonist) in battle production, an example may be considered in which a mission bonus is easily displayed and displayed when a big hit is usually drawn between a definite change big hit and a normal big hit.

  If the fourth big hit (battle bonus) is 15R definite variation, the first rush described above is executed again after the end of the special game. And after that, the above-mentioned 4th big hit (battle bonus) is executed according to the kind of big hit which occurred. Also, if the fourth big hit (battle bonus) is a big hit other than 15R probability variation, as shown in the lower left, right, middle and lower in FIG. 19, according to the type of the big hit, the second specific gaming state (second rush ) Or the third specified gaming state (third rush) will be the specified gaming state. In addition, when the big hit that becomes 15R definite variation is acquired in the specific gaming state, it is indicated to the player by stopping the specific symbol such as “7 (※ add the character string of“ Hyper ”to the symbol”) as the effect symbol , Complete the battle production in the battle bonus in a winning mode.

  Among them, the second specific gaming state (second rush) is executed when the fourth big hit (battle bonus) is either 10R positive variation, 7R positive variation, 10R normal, or 7R normal. Furthermore, in the second specific gaming state (the second rush), there may be a case where a definite change (and a short time) is given until the next big hit, and a case where only 100 short hours are given as well. And in the second specified gaming state (the second rush), the continuation rate of the specified game (probability of winning a big hit during the specified game) is 76%. Here, the "second rush" can also be taken as the name of the effect relating to the second specified gaming state. In addition, “the second rush” is a rendering mode (sub mode) controlled only in the 100 fluctuation periods after the big hit, and when it is in a state of high probability internally, it is always from the 101st fluctuation. In addition to transition control to "1st rush", when a limited frequency pattern or a specific variation pattern is selected in the middle of 100 variation periods, a game state that can output a promotion effect to "first rush" At the moment when the player is controlled to the "second rush", the player is in a so-called "latency" gaming state where it is unclear whether the lottery is internally made with high probability or low probability. In addition, when the big hit (10R positive variation, 10R normal variation, 7R positive variation, 7R normal) that will shift to the "second rush" is obtained, the symbols other than "7" are stopped as a production pattern, and during the battle bonus The effect is completed in the victory mode in the battle effect of.

  The aforementioned third specified gaming state (third rush) is executed when the fourth big hit (battle bonus) is 5R normal. Furthermore, in the third specific gaming state (third rush), only 100 times are reduced, and the continuation rate of the specific gaming is 27%. Here, the "third rush" may be a name of an effect relating to the third specified gaming state. In addition, when the big hit (5R normal) which becomes the "third rush" transition is acquired during the specific game, all except "7" is stopped as the effect pattern, and the battle effect during the battle bonus is completed by the effect of the defeat mode Let

  As described above, the probability of becoming a big hit to shift to the first rush and the second rush (probability of winning with a battle bonus) is 5R (25%) in the special figure 2 game which is the main game in the specific game. It is 75% that is the probability of acquiring a non-event, and the probability of becoming a big hit to shift to the third rush is 25% that is the probability of acquiring 5R normal. In a pachinko gaming machine that generates a general battle bonus, since it is controlled to shift to two different modes after winning and losing, the probability of probability change (in the present embodiment, 15R positive variation, 10R positive variation, 7R positive variation 65 %) Can only output the victory effect on the main character side with the probability corresponding to%), but as in this embodiment, provide a second rush (probability variation big hit, an effect mode in which the main character side wins and shifts in any normal big hit) In the situation where the probability that the effect of the victory mode can be output during the battle bonus can be raised (75%) higher than the probability variation probability (65%), it is disadvantageous for the player in a situation where the ball is won during the big hit It is possible to reduce the execution of the notification in which the situation is fixed, or to give the player an impression that the main character is strong.

  If a big hit does not occur during these second rush (low probability) or third rush, and the second specified gaming state or the third specified gaming state ends (when it becomes a temporary loss), the left middle row in FIG. Switch to the normal mode shown in (fall). In addition, the mode (second rush or third rush) of the effects performed during the second specified gaming state or the third specified gaming state is also a kind of sub mode similarly to the first rush described above. In addition, although it defines as the 1st-3rd specific gaming state for convenience, as a state in the main control means (here main board 102) of the 2nd specific gaming state, the 1st specific gaming state which is a definite change until the next time, It is the same as any of the third specific gaming state which is 100 times short game state (low probability). In addition, including the viewpoint whether or not to use the selection state (limit frequency) of the fluctuation pattern as the gaming state, the details will be described later, but the second specific gaming state is the first and third gaming states in the 100 game periods. It can be said that it is a gaming state different from.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, 100 times may be assigned to the 5R normal big hit of the normal big hit (non-probable variation big hit) included in the special figure 1 as well. As a case where 100 times of time reduction is awarded, if you have won a 5R normal big hit in the special figure 1 during the specific gaming state ("big hit related to the special figure 1 in special situations described below occurs. Can be illustrated. By doing this, the special game 1 is played with the special figure 1 game which is not assumed as the main game, and the situation that the player can not obtain the time-saving benefit can not be generated, or the specific It is possible to control to output a consistent big hit effect as a big hit effect during the specific game by applying the battle effect as it is to the big hit of the special figure 1 as the big hit effect during the game state. In this case, the battle victory effect is output in the 15R positive variation and the 5R positive error in the special figure 1, and the battle defeat effect is output in the 5R normal. In addition, the time to make the battle effect appear in the sudden hit (2R probability variation) of Toku-zu figure 1 and a message such as "Resuming status" or "Please wait for a while" is displayed to the player, Implement an effect that encourages waiting. Further, the number of time reductions for the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is not limited to 100 times, and it is also possible to adopt 20 times, 40 times, 60 times, 80 times, etc., for example. Furthermore, it is possible to give different numbers of times depending on the type of hit.

  In addition, the above-mentioned first big hit (mission bonus) is referred to as, for example, "mission big hit", other second big hit (hyper bonus), third big hit (probable) as "non mission big hit" or "non mission bonus" It is possible to call. Also, the fourth big hit (battle bonus) can be called, for example, "battle big hit" or the like. Furthermore, it is possible to include the 4th big hit (battle bonus) in "mission big hit" and "mission bonus".

  In addition, it is possible to adopt a content in which a person performing a match or battle appears as a story in the special game production relating to the first hit (mission bonus). In this case, the first hit It is also possible to call it "bonus" or the like.

Furthermore, it is possible to call the first rush, for example, "probably determined mode", "high probability high base mode" or the like. Furthermore, it is possible to refer to the second rush as, for example, the “short latency mode”, “latency high base mode” and the like, and to refer to the third rush as, for example, the “low probability determination mode” and “low probability high base mode” .
<Summary of effects pertaining to special games>

  Next, an outline of the basic specifications and effects of the special game in the pachinko gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described. First, it is assumed that one round will end with the entry of 10 balls (so-called 10 counts), and the shortest round will be around 6 seconds. That is, assuming that the firing speed of the gaming ball (the frequency of firing) does not exceed 100 shots per minute (for example, 100 shots), the minimum of 10 balls entering the big winning opening (91 or 92) However, it takes 6 seconds, which is the time it takes to fire 10 balls.

  In addition, when a big hit of 15R (here 15R positive variation) occurs, the possible time to enter the ball is at least 90 seconds (= 6 seconds × 15R), the entire period of the special game (for example, start demo start to end demo end Time) is about 100 seconds. And in the present embodiment, the period of the start demonstration is extremely short, about 0 to 2 seconds.

  Furthermore, with regard to the round effect when the big hit of 15R occurs, for example, the big hit start demonstration and the first R and second R, the name display of the big hit, such as "○ bonus", "battle bonus" etc. It takes place, and a character (enemy character), which is a partner in a mission or battle, appears. Then, in the third R, effects such as a character (self-character) such as a hero who is the opponent of the enemy character attacking, or an effect in which an ally character (friend character) performing a battle with the self-character joins (merging effect) Is done. Here, the round effect in which the battle with the own character and the enemy character is performed can be called "round battle effect" or the like.

  In addition, in the fourth R, there is an effect in which the player character and the enemy character, the ally character and the enemy character perform a battle, etc., and in the fifth R, an effect such that the character or ally character wins the battle (wining effect) However, it is performed as a production (also referred to as a development rendition rendition, a promotion rendition rendition, or the like) that the player expects the player to progress to the next round or to be promoted to a definite change. Here, the effect at this time may be such that the player character and the friend character jointly fight the enemy character. Furthermore, in the 6th and 7th eyes, for example, a presentation is performed to honor the player's profit such as "winning !!" "Sorry ..." display is performed, and a presentation of content is performed that suggests that the profit of the specific game (certain) has not been obtained. At this time, it is also possible to execute an effect in which the movable effect member (93, 94, etc.) as described above performs a predetermined operation. In addition, it is possible to provide a movable effect member imitating equipment and the like related to a battle, and to operate this movable effect member at the time of a battle scene up to the 5th R.

  Furthermore, after the 8th R, it is possible to output a predetermined music, and to display a scene in which one's own character or ally character rejoices, a reminiscence scene relating to one's own character or ally character, or the like. In addition, as described above, when a movie or a cartoon (comic) is adopted as a story relating to a presentation, a predetermined scene of a movie, or an image obtained by converting a cartoon into image data is output. It is also possible to do. Then, when the opening of the 15th R is finished and the end demonstration period comes, according to the game mode after that, a display such as "XXX mode entry", "XX mode continued", etc. is made for a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds to 5 seconds).

  FIG. 20 (a) schematically illustrates, in time series, an example of a series of flows of the gaming state and the effect according to such a special game. The upper part in FIG. 20A shows the state detected in the main (main board 102), and the lower part shows an outline of the effects corresponding to the main state. For example, in the situation shown in the upper part of the main that is recognized as a big hit start demonstration situation, the effect by the sub main board 301 is a big hit start display (bonus display).

  Furthermore, when the first game of the special game is started in the main, in the example of FIG. 20A, battle effect is executed at a predetermined timing. Furthermore, the special game progresses from the 1Rth to the 6Rth, and the button effect (described as “button” in FIG. 20A) as described above is executed, and the button operation by the player is detected. In the case where the effect is developed, a predetermined movable effect member (93, 94, etc.) is activated here, and an effect of winning the battle is further executed.

  In the example of FIG. 20 (a), the special game of 7R or later progresses in this period, and when the final 15R special game is finished, the main is in the state of the big hit end demonstration. Thereafter, the gaming state shifts to the first rush here. At this time, as the effect, an effect after battle victory or an effect indicating transition to the first rush (here, referred to as “other effect”) is executed, and the background of the big hit end demonstration after the end of the special game is performed. Migration is performed.

Here, in the present embodiment, the result of winning and losing may be displayed earlier than the normal effect as shown in FIG. Then, in this case, for example, it is conceivable that an effect (wining effect) in which the own character or the ally character wins is performed at the timing of the fourth and fifth eyes. Furthermore, in these cases, it is possible to carry out and carry out the effects of the seventh and subsequent eyes described above, as shown in FIG. 20 (b), for the fifth and sixth eyes. Further, as shown in FIG. 20 (b), it is possible to perform the timing of the button effect at an early timing of the battle effect, and shift to the battle victory effect triggered by the button operation. Furthermore, although illustration is omitted, it is also possible to perform button effects multiple times, both before and after the battle effect.
<Summary of effects pertaining to the first rush>

  Next, the above-mentioned first rush (sub mode 1) will be described more specifically. First, during the first rush, most of the effects are performed by the extremely short fluctuation time fluctuation pattern as described above. In the present embodiment, the fluctuation pattern in the first rush is provided to such an extent that an average of 40 times of fluctuation is performed in one minute. The frequency of occurrence of such fluctuation game (also referred to as the progression speed of the game) can be called, for example, "SA 40" or the like.

  Further, in this embodiment, although a plurality of types are provided as fluctuation patterns (loss fluctuation) to be selected in the case of loss during the first rush, the fluctuation of almost (for example, 95%) is 0.6 seconds. It is a pattern. Furthermore, among the fluctuation patterns in this outlier fluctuation, the fluctuation time is 3 seconds at the longest fluctuation time, and in addition, fluctuation patterns of 1 second, 1.5 seconds and 2 seconds are provided. . And the ratio of these fluctuation patterns in total deviation fluctuation is, for example, 1% 2%, 1.5 seconds 1.5%, 2 seconds 1.0%, 3 seconds 0.5%, etc. It is possible to do.

  In addition, the fluctuation pattern of the big hit fluctuation (big hit fluctuation), the fluctuation time is 0.6 seconds to 3 seconds, and it is a specification to stop all the production symbols almost at the same time without performing the reach effect (the stop timing is There may be a situation where two symbols are formally hearing (reach) formally shifted, but there is a case that the design does not particularly clearly notify that it is a reach such as "reach" vocalization), and the symbol is about the effect pattern (190) The time during which the decision is stopped (the symbol fixed time related to the effect pattern) is set to be relatively longer than the out-of-out fluctuation. For example, it is conceivable to set the symbol fixing time for out-of-order variation to 0.5 seconds and to set the symbol fixing time for hitting variation to 3 seconds or the like. Then, the relatively long symbol fixing time can be used as a period for adding a symbol effect as if it is to be blessed to the effect symbol (190) (applying a symbol effect). In addition, it is possible to set the time required for execution of the symbol effect in association with the symbol fixed time. For example, when the symbol fixing time is 0.5 seconds (when there is a disconnection), the time required for the symbol effect is 0.6 seconds, and the start timing of the symbol effect and the symbol fixing time is the same. Since the pattern effect is executed over the pattern fixing time, it is possible to set the pattern effect to 0.5 seconds so as to be within the pattern fixing time. Here, the symbol fixing time at the time of hitting is, for example, 3 seconds, and is used as a period of effect (suffering effect effect) such as the above-mentioned symbol effect or fanfare.

  Furthermore, the ratio of the fluctuation time of these per-variations is, for example, 10% for 0.6 seconds, 10% for 1 second, 10% for 1.5 seconds, 40% for 2 seconds, 3 seconds for the total fluctuation Is considered to be 30%. And, due to the relationship between the composition of the fluctuation time of these outlier fluctuation and the composition of the fluctuation time of the hit fluctuation and the big hit probability in the first rush (here 1 / about 46.8), the player is roughly 1 It is possible to give an image that it hits in just over a minute.

  That is, since the big hit probability during the first rush is about 1 / 46.8, theoretically, the probability that a big hit can occur at a rate of once in about 47 games (47 revolutions), which is a probability denominator, is It is about 63% (calculated from the value excluding the probability of not being able to draw a big hit for 47 consecutive times). And, as described above, in the present embodiment, since the game proceeds at a speed of SA 40 (= 40 revolutions / minute), it is less than one minute 15 seconds for 47 revolutions (more specifically, It takes 1 minute 12 seconds = 60 seconds × 47 revolutions / 40 revolutions). For this reason, it can be said that the pachinko gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment can pull most of the big hit in about 1 minute and 15 seconds during the first rush. Here, when the above-mentioned "probability denominator" is considered as "within the probability denominator", the above-mentioned "47 times" can be considered to be replaced with "46 times". Further, the following description can be made in relation to such a probability denominator. For example, “variation interval is the sum of the fluctuation time (for example, 0.6 seconds) according to one fluctuation of the rendering pattern 190 and the symbol fixing time (for example, 0.5 seconds) that is the stop display time of the rendering pattern 190. The probability of becoming a big hit is expressed as a fraction (1/319 or 1 / 46.8, etc.) where the numerator is 1, and the next big hit occurs from the end of the special game pertaining to the previous big hit. The period up to is referred to as "big hit interval time". Then, assuming that the above-mentioned big hit interval time is a value obtained by multiplying the numerical value (such as 46.8) that is the denominator of the fraction and the expected value of the variation interval time (such as 1.1 seconds), the big hit The interval time (such as 50.6 seconds (46 x 1.1 seconds)) is controlled to the special game when the special game (15R probability change etc) most advantageous for the player is played (100 seconds etc.) It can be shorter than).

  Further, among the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, at the time of the first rush shift, the variation pattern table (time variation pattern table) related to the limited frequency pattern effect is not used. Then, at the time of the first rush transition, it is also possible to use a regular time variation pattern table other than the limited frequency pattern effect.

Here, a variation pattern table used during the above-mentioned third rush can be illustrated as a normal time-span / mid-term variation pattern table. Then, a special effect pattern to be selected during the first rush is associated with the fluctuation pattern defined in the fluctuation pattern table used during the third rush, while using the same fluctuation pattern table as the third rush It can be considered that the effect pattern for the first rush is selected. Also, the present invention is not limited to this, and a dedicated time and medium variation pattern table to be selected during the first rush may be provided.
<Pre-reading effect pertaining to the first rush>

  Next, various pre-reading effects in the first rush will be described. First, as one example of the pre-reading effect, the above-mentioned symbol effect (symbol effect advance notice) can be mentioned. As this symbol effect, various effects can be exemplified such as lighting each of the effect symbols 190a to 190c only momentarily (for example, about 0.5 seconds). And, as the pre-read effect by the symbol effect, for example, if the symbol effect is applied at the time of the variation stop due to the previous change of the time, the effect is such that the development of the effect and the expectation of the big hit increase in the change of the time It is conceivable to perform control.

  In addition, if the design effect is continuously applied at the time of the change stop over a plurality of changes, the development of the presentation and the expectation of the big hit may be increased in the change of the time. Furthermore, if the variation applied with the symbol effect is repeated several times continuously, and the number of repetitions is, for example, three or four times, the expectation of the development and the jackpot increase in the fluctuation of the time, etc. It is possible to perform presentation control in an aspect. Here, in the present embodiment, since the upper limit of the number of reservations is four, when retention occurs as a trigger suspension, up to three pre-reading effects are performed except for the fluctuation display that is already fluctuatingly displayed. It becomes basic. However, if prefetching is performed at the time of symbol stop like symbol effect (immediately before the end of change), replacement is performed so that the effect is generated at the time of symbol stop of the change at predetermined timing during symbol change By doing, up to four pre-reading effects become possible. Here, as the above-mentioned "predetermined timing during symbol variation", it is possible to exemplify transmission of a symbol stop instruction command (here, symbol 2 effect pattern stop command, etc.) to the image control CPU (here, sub main CPU).

  In addition, with regard to the pattern effect at the time of each variation stop, the more the number of times the light shines and the number of times the bright spot circulates (the number of repetitions during the production), for example, two or three It is also possible to perform presentation control in such a manner that the degree of expectation increases. Furthermore, it is also possible to perform the effect control in a mode in which the chance is raised according to the amount (small, large), the color (blue, red), etc. of the symbol effect.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the upper limit of the number of reservations is four, and therefore, when retention 4 occurs as a trigger suspension, the pre-reading effect is basically up to three times. However, if prefetching is performed at the time of symbol stop like symbol effect (immediately before the end of change), replacement is performed so that the effect is generated at the time of symbol stop of the change at predetermined timing during symbol change By doing, up to four pre-reading effects become possible. Here, as the above-mentioned "predetermined timing during symbol variation", it is possible to exemplify transmission of a symbol stop instruction command (here, symbol 2 effect pattern stop command, etc.) to the image control CPU (here, sub main CPU).

  Subsequently, bullet mark advance which is one of pre-reading effects will be described. In this bullet mark advance, a glass plate is placed on a predetermined area (for example, the whole or most part) of the screen, and an image display effect is performed as if a bullet was shot into the glass plate, as illustrated in FIG. As a result, a bullet strikes the glass plate and a display of a bullet mark (bullet image 181) attached is executed. Furthermore, the bullet mark image 181 is started to be displayed, for example, at the start of the change of the effect patterns 190a to 190c.

  Here, when the effect patterns 190a to 190c are performed using the center of the screen, it is conceivable that the effect patterns 190a to 190c and the bullet mark image 181 overlap and the visibility of the effect patterns 190a to 190c is reduced. However, it is possible to prevent overlapping of the effect patterns 190a to 190c and the bullet mark image 181 by displaying the effect patterns 190a to 190c in a reduced size in the upper corner portion of the screen or the like. Moreover, it is possible to prevent the fall of visibility also by deleting the bullet-mark image 181 at the time of stop of the production | presentation pattern 190a-190c. In addition, it is possible to include not only the time of a definite stop but the time of temporary stop in "at the time of stop" of production design 190a-190c here.

  In this bullet mark advance, the number of images displayed as bullet marks increases or the shape changes according to the degree of expectation. The bullet mark advance notice is also designed to increase the degree of expectation by overlapping the number of changes, and the number may increase as the number of changes is increased. In the example of FIG. 21 (a), a state in which a bullet hole advance notice is given for three times of fluctuation is shown. Further, in the bullet mark advance, the number is represented by the number of bullet marks, and if the number of bullet marks is relatively large, effect control is performed such that the expectation concerning the development of the effect and the jackpot is high. Then, control is performed so as to execute a notice effect equivalent to the bullet mark advance in the change in trigger hold, and when the number of bullet marks reaches, for example, four or more, a state where the glass plate is broken is represented by display or sound (only display is possible ), The big hit symbol (combination of 3-digit alignment of the producing symbols 190a to 190c) is displayed, and the main character (when the big hit symbol is “7”, ie, definite variation confirmed or maximum R big hit) or enemy character during battle bonus ( It is also possible to perform effect control in such a manner that the jackpot symbol "7" appears). In this case, the execution of the bullet hole advance notice is determined based on the fact that, for example, the variation pattern of 2 seconds or 3 seconds is selected instead of the ultrashort variation of about 0.6 seconds for the variation pattern of the trigger variation at this time. It is desirable to draw a lottery.

  Subsequently, the countdown notice, which is one of the pre-reading effects, will be described. In this countdown notice, countdown display such as “3”, “2”, “1”, “0” is performed for each change. At this time, it is also possible to perform sound output such as "three", "two", "one" and "zero". And if presentation is advanced to "1", presentation will be performed by the control mode that a big hit will be decided by the next fluctuation. In the above-described example, the variation in which “0” is displayed is a notice to be executed in the trigger hold variation that is a big hit, and although it is a series of successive notices as countdown notices, strictly speaking, it is not a pre-reading effect. In the example described above, the jackpot has been determined by the display of “1”, but it may be designed to provide a pattern that becomes a cassette pattern (release of trigger hold) in the display of “1”.

  This countdown notice is different in nature from the above-mentioned symbol effect and bullet mark notice in that the jackpot is determined if the notice progresses to "1". In other words, the above-mentioned symbol effect and bullet mark advance, if the number of times of execution of the effect relatively increases, the development of the effect and the degree of expectation of the high probability value will increase, but the countdown advance is the number of times If it reaches, it is the production which becomes a big hit decision. And, in this embodiment, the pre-read effect of the kind such as the above-mentioned symbol effect and bullet hole notice, and the kind of effect such as the countdown notice different from these are provided.

  Further, in the present embodiment, since the main variation pattern during the first rush is an ultra-short variation, the time for so-called reserve digestion is shortened. For this reason, it can be assumed that a relatively large number of situations occur where the number of reservations remains at 1 to 3 without reaching the upper limit number of four. However, as with the above-mentioned symbol effects and bullet marks, expectations about developments etc. increase with the number of repetitions, but with regard to pre-reading notices of a nature, that is, according to the upper limit number of reservations With regard to the effect that the degree increases, the number of repetitions of the effect does not reach three times and four times, and the opportunity to effectively execute the effect decreases. For this reason, in the present embodiment, the prefetching effect of the above-mentioned pending change or countdown notice occurs in any case of 1 to 4 pending numbers, but the bullet mark advance and the symbol effect will be described later. Effect control is performed so as to limit the occurrence of effects by the number of reservations.

  In addition, as for the pre-reading effect of symbol effects and bullet mark advance notice, it is not selected unless the number of reservations has reached a predetermined number (for example, three) or more (if there is a prohibition or there is a number of reservations If the number is 2 or less, only outliers are selected in the pre-reading execution lottery). And about the pre-reading effect of the symbol effect and bullet mark advance, the effect effect of the pre-reading effect of the symbol effect and bullet mark pre-noting effect in the case of the number of pending is 0 to 2 is not provided, but the number of pending is 0 to 2 In the situation of, the pre-reading effect of the symbol effect and the bullet mark advance notice is not decided.

  Subsequently, the pre-reading effect performed by associating the effect in the first rush and the on-hold change will be described. In the present embodiment, as described above, the orange hold display is adopted as the display mode in the basic color with respect to the special figure 2, and when the hold change is performed, red, gold and rainbow colors are used. It is possible to perform display with a predetermined pattern or the like. In the present embodiment, character display may be performed as one of the modes of the hold change during the first rush.

  For example, as a mode of holding change, there may be a case where a pre-reading holding display (enemy character holding) using an enemy character is performed. As shown in FIG. 21 (b), this enemy character hold is, for example, a hold display pertaining to during fluctuation (here, during special character 2 fluctuation) as shown in FIG. 21 (b). It is possible to do by using as. That is, in the example of FIG. 21 (b), an enemy character A (reserve 1) and an enemy character B (reserve 3) that appear in the round effect at the time of the big hit as a reserved display (here, displays of save 1 and save 3). The image is used in the form of a statement for finding enemy characters A and B. Then, if the reserve for which the enemy character reserve is performed is saved, and it becomes a big hit at the time of the change, the enemy character used for the enemy character reserve appears in the round effect during the special game. , The production which fights with a self-character or an ally character is executed.

  Here, for the enemy character retention, based on the type of the jackpot symbol determined on the main substrate 102 side, on the sub main substrate 301 side, the presence or absence of execution of the enemy character, the type of the enemy character, etc. are drawn It is possible to do. Furthermore, it is conceivable to determine the contents of the round effect (type of enemy character to appear, the effect pattern, etc.) in accordance with the determined enemy character relating to the enemy character retention. Alternatively, it is conceivable to first determine an enemy character appearing in a round effect, and determine a display mode of enemy character retention based on the determined enemy character.

  Furthermore, although illustration is abbreviate | omitted as an aspect of the other holding | maintenance change, the pending | holding display (friend character holding | maintenance) of a prefetch using an ally character may be performed. This ally character hold is performed, for example, by using an image of the face of the ally character joining during the round effect at the time of the big hit as a hold display, as in the case of the enemy character hold (see FIG. 21B). Is possible. And, when a big hit occurs due to a change related to the reserve digestion, the allied character reserve can be used for an effect such that the ally character used for the associate character reserve is decided as an ally character joining in a round effect. is there.

  Here, such enemy character reserve and friend character reserve can be used not only for the pre-reading effect but also, for example, as an effect relating to a predetermined game section (also referred to as a “zone” or “game zone”) . For example, it is possible to illustrate a situation in which the game mode enters a predetermined zone, and an effect with a sense of unity can be executed so that it can be recognized that the zone has been entered across a plurality of predetermined fluctuations. Furthermore, while the gaming state is in such a zone, for example, "in the middle of participating in xxx" in the case of the ally character zone, and "in the middle of approaching xxx" in the case of the enemy character zone. You may display it. Here, "○○" represents the name of the friend character or the enemy character. When a big hit occurs in the state of being controlled to the state of the zone, as in the case of the character hold, the corresponding character is made to appear as a join of allies characters as an effect during the big hit or as an opponent.

  And, when the enemy character is held by any fluctuation while the gaming state is in the zone (friend character), if a big hit occurs by the fluctuation when digesting the enemy character hold, the special game It can be considered that effect control is performed in such a manner that it is determined that a combined effect of an enemy character and an ally character appearing in a round effect at time is output.

  Further, in the example of the effect shown in FIG. 21 (b), the advance notice of the change in the holding frame is made. In the advance notice of the change of the holding frame, a holding frame 182 surrounding the holding number display unit (here, the second holding number display unit 197) is displayed. Then, if the coloring of the holding frame 182 changes, for example, from the basic display mode of blue to yellow, red, or gold, it is suggested that presentation control is performed in a manner that suggests that there is a high level of expectation for stage development or jackpot. To be done.

  In addition, it is also possible to utilize the aspect of the various pre-reading effects demonstrated so far not as pre-reading effect but as a pseudo pre-reading notice as mentioned above. For example, for a part of the effects performed in various pre-reading effects, the advance lottery at the start of the change (when the pre-read is not performed (not trigger hold) hold is a big hit) In the lottery for determining various preliminary effects, it is possible to determine the execution of the same or substantially the same effects as a part of the pre-reading effects. More specifically, the aspect of the above-mentioned countdown notice, which is the pre-reading effect, is used as a pseudo pre-reading notice. In the pseudo-prereading notice corresponding to the countdown notice, in the fluctuation that becomes the big hit, the remaining number of holdings and the number of matches smaller than the remaining number of holdings are displayed such as "3" or "2" It can be exemplified to control the presentation mode so as to be a big hit by the fluctuation.

  By giving such a pseudo continuous notice, the player is made to assume that "pre-reading has begun", "something may occur due to the next few changes," etc. It is possible to perform what is called a law breaking presentation in which a sudden hit is displayed within the fluctuation. Then, it is possible to execute both the countdown notice as an authentic pre-reading effect and the countdown notice as a pseudo pre-reading effect, and determine the number of effect patterns so that the countdown notice as a genuine pre-reading effect is frequently performed. By doing this, it is possible to use the countdown notice as a pseudo-prediction effect as an effect (a rule collapse effect) for an exception to the countdown notice as an authentic pre-read effect.

  The rule breaking rendition is a pre-read notice mentioned above, the effect of progressing for each change like a countdown notice, rather than the expectation increase depending on the number of repetitions such as symbol effect and bullet mark notice (step-up as another example It is desirable to be able to execute the pseudo-prereading notice for the pre-reading notice that is easy to guess for the player at the start stage of the presentation at which time there is a possibility of a big hit.

  Furthermore, it is possible to adopt a control mode in which this law breaking effect is performed only in the case where it is a fluctuation that becomes a big hit and the big hit is one that returns to the first rush (here, 15R positive variation). It is possible. In this case, both the big hit random number and the symbol random number (which may be the big hit random number and the pre-reading information regarding the symbol random number) may be determined, and the rule breaking effect may be executed at a predetermined ratio when the condition is satisfied. It is possible.

  In addition, even in the second and third rushes described above, it is possible to execute genuine pre-reading effect (here, countdown advance notice) and pseudo pre-reading advance notice effect. In the second rush state, which is the latent state, the first rush shift finalization is determined with reference to the information on the big hit random number and the symbol random number as in the first rush, and control is performed at the first rush shift finalization big hit. In the first rush and the second rush, unlike the first rush and the second rush, the decision of the execution is determined depending on which specific gaming state it is in, so that the execution can be determined as long as the information about the big hit random number is the information indicating the big hit. You may control so that the profit degree which an aspect and a production | presentation show may differ. As the reason for making the condition of the effect determination different in this way, especially in the third rush, since the jackpot probability itself is in a low state, the occurrence of the effect is determined under the same conditions as the first and second rushes. In this case, the possibility of the effect is significantly reduced, and there is a risk that the amusement of the game may be reduced compared to other gaming states.

  In addition, in the first rush, the second rush, or the third rush game state, when the pseudo pre-reading advance notice effect is executed, it is notified only that hitting the big hit, which It is also possible to produce contents such that it is not clear at the end of the change game at that time whether or not the type of big hit is hit.

  Here, during the short time (here, the third rush) performed under normal probability, the player can recognize not only the occurrence of the big hit but also whether the type of the big hit is a definite change or not. It can be considered that doing is not useful because it deprives the player of the opportunity to enjoy, such as whether promotion to a definite change is notified or not by subsequent rendering (such as rendering during a special game). For this reason, by not notifying the type of the big hit when the time is performed under the normal probability, it is possible to enhance the effect of the subsequent promotion effect.

  In addition, as a modification related to the implementation of the law breaking rendition, it is not intended to carry out pseudo pre-reading advance notice, and intentional start timing of the rendition during continuous notice based on the pre-reading is performed with and without the law breaking rendition It can also be implemented by making More specifically, when the rule breaking rendition is not performed (when the normal pre-reading effect is performed), “3”, “2”, and “1” are obtained as the number of times of change increases. Is displayed, but in the case of performing a breakdown of the law, a variable effect is performed twice without displaying the countdown (here, the display of “3” and the display of “2”), and the following change game (trigger The display of "3" is performed in the case where the hold is a hold 1).

  At this point (fluctuation at the point when trigger hold exists in Retain 1), the player may recognize that the display of the countdown following "3" will be performed in the subsequent fluctuating game, but the display of "3" In the next change of the change being performed, the display of “2” is performed and the big hit design is performed by stopping the big hit symbol. By doing this, it is possible to perform a jackpot effect without advancing the countdown display to the end, and it is possible to perform the rule collapse effect of an aspect different from that described above. Here, in the law collapse based on the genuine pre-reading effect, while the pseudo pre-reading advance notice of the big hit fluctuation is completed in 1 fluctuation, as mentioned above, the aspect where the law is broken while progressing in plural fluctuation is displayed It is possible to make it

  Further, in the present embodiment, a timer effect (variation timer effect) as exemplified below is executed. That is, the fluctuation timer effect described here is executed during the gaming state (game mode) in which the extremely short fluctuation is performed, and in this embodiment, the fluctuation timer effect is performed during the first rush. There is.

  In addition, the fluctuation timer effect performed in association with the ultra-short fluctuation is an effect of starting to count up from the start of the first fluctuation in the first rush. Further, the counting is stopped at the timing when the effect pattern 190 becomes the combination of the big hit, and the sub main board 301 stores the count value at that time. And, when winning in the battle during the round effect related to the fourth jackpot, in the first rush to be performed after the special game, an image related to the enemy character defeated in the previous first rush, and the stored count value The icon images 183 and 184 are superimposed and displayed on the background in the first rush at that time (see FIG. 22A).

  Furthermore, while the first rush and the fourth big hit continue, the icon images 183 and 184 indicating the count value when defeating the enemy character increase. Then, the player can check the time required to defeat the enemy character by visually recognizing the icon images 183 and 184. By performing such a fluctuation timer effect, it is possible for the player to have a feeling as to how long it takes during the first rush to defeat an enemy character and acquire a big hit. And it becomes possible to recognize not only the feeling but also the visual sense of the quickness to the big hit acquisition by the change for a very short time.

In addition, regarding fluctuation timer production, game control such that 4th big hit (battle bonus) is decided, or, when the count of the timer is stopped in the situation where production design 190a-190c is not complete, or almost with high reliability, game control It is possible to adopt an aspect. Also, the game is such that the coloring or pattern of numbers etc. in the timer display is, for example, blue, green, red, iridescent, or a predetermined pattern etc, and the expectation of the fourth big hit changes according to the difference of the coloring or pattern It is also possible to adopt a control mode. In addition, even if the control to stop the fluctuation timer first is executed, the internal counter that counts time in the effect control board is updated, and the time that has been stopped after symbol stop is corrected to the time to be displayed originally The player can be made to impress the player with an accurate feeling of payout per unit time by executing the accurate time display up to the big hit acquisition in the later icon display. Further, although the fluctuation timer effect is herein described as the effect in the first rush, it may be performed in the second rush or the third rush. Furthermore, it is possible to continue to display the icon images 183 and 184 as described above, even if they shift to a different specific gaming state next time.
<Summary of the effects of the fourth jackpot>

  Next, special games when a fourth big hit (battle bonus) occurs during the first rush and effects relating to the special games will be described. In addition, although the description which concerns on the big hit which concerns on the special figure 2 is performed here, even if it is the big hit which concerns on the special figure 1, if it generate | occur | produced in specific situations, such as time, for example, it is applicable.

  First, if you hit a big hit (for example, the 4th big hit (for example, a battle bonus)) in the so-called high base (for example, the first rush etc.) where the frequency of winnings is high like time saving, medium speed etc. In, self-characters and ally characters are supposed to fight against enemy characters (round battle effect). When the player character or ally character wins the battle, the game mode shifts to either the first rush or the second rush. Further, when the player character or the ally character loses the fight, the game mode shifts to the third rush.

  Furthermore, the round battle rendition in the fourth big hit (battle bonus) is to be settled by 5R. This is because the player is made to recognize that it was 5R normal at the time of defeat.

  Also, the selection rate of the enemy characters is different according to the effect pattern (big hit symbol) when the big hit is reached. That is, the winning rate and the reward (outball) are set for each type of enemy character, and for example, it is easy to win against a predetermined enemy character, out balls when it wins (round number), and other predetermined enemy characters. The ease of winning and the number of rounds of winning are different from each other.

  More specifically, when a player hits a jackpot of 15R and wins a predetermined enemy character (here, enemy character A), an effect with a relatively high winning ratio is performed, and the player gets a special game. Rewards are also relatively high. However, in the case of winning the 10R positive variation or 7R positive variation and winning against another predetermined enemy character (here, enemy character B in this case), an effect of high or medium win rate is performed, and the player gains The rewards will also be moderate to low compared to the 15R big hit time.

  Furthermore, if the player wins the 10R normal or 7R normal, and further wins against another predetermined enemy character (here, the enemy character C), an effect with a medium winning ratio is performed, and the player is rewarded. Also moderate to low. In addition, if the player wins the 5R normal and further wins against another predetermined enemy character (here, the enemy character D), an effect with a relatively low winning rate is performed, and the reward obtained by the player is also 10R or It is low compared to the time of 7R.

  In addition, when an ally character appears during a round battle effect, an effect may be performed in which the winning rate or the reward (here, the number of rounds) is upgraded (promoted). In order to perform such an upgrade, if the type of the big hit symbol (big hit special symbol) is a predetermined one, at the side of the sub main board 301, it is raised at the start of the special game or in the middle of the special game When the display lottery (changing the opponent from strong opponent to weak opponent) is executed and the upgraded display lottery is won, it is conceivable that an enemy character is selected in advance from among the subordinate characters.

  Furthermore, it is possible to perform effects such that the upgraded amount (upgrading width) differs according to the type of the joining character. In order to do this, for example, it is conceivable to provide a special ally character (a strongest ally character that is a premier character) that has a winning percentage of 100% and a reward MAX (15R in this case). And, when this strongest allied character joins the self character, there is no possibility of being a 5R big hit (be sure to progress after 6 R), and the effect must also be won in the battle with the enemy character, or it will be a draw or It can be exemplified that it is undecided (battle continuation). In addition, when the strongest ally character appears, the relationship between the effect and the game content may be determined such as progressing to 15R with a relatively high probability (90% or the like) without fail. Furthermore, multiple types of strongest ally characters may be provided. Furthermore, it is also possible to refer to the strongest ally character as "super hot character" or the like.

Here, various characters are provided in addition to the above-mentioned strongest ally character as the ally character, and various aspects can be considered for characteristics such as a reward and a winning rate of the ally character. For example, when a predetermined allied character appears, it is possible to consider an effect in which only the winning rate is increased and the reward is not upgraded even if it is won. However, when providing various ally characters in this way, for example, an imbalance such as appearing ally characters loses while being directed to promote (with chance up) It is necessary to be aware of the rendering patterns that can be selected so as not to appear.
<Summary of effects pertaining to the second rush>

  Next, the effects relating to the aforementioned second rush will be described. First, in the present embodiment, the fluctuation game frequency for the second rush is the above-mentioned SA40 (= 40 rotations / minute), and the fluctuation pattern table (the restriction pattern related to the above-mentioned limited frequency pattern effect is applied as the fluctuation pattern table to be applied (Also referred to as a frequency table or a limited frequency pattern table). Further, in the present embodiment, there may be a case where an effect pattern of several seconds to several tens of seconds, which is a reach, may be selected while using SA40.

  However, not limited to this, for example, it is possible not to adopt the SA 40, but to perform the fluctuation game at a frequency lower than that of the SA 40 by a very short fluctuation pattern or an effect pattern of several seconds to several tens of seconds. It is.

  Moreover, as a usage aspect of the fluctuation | variation pattern table in a present Example, the following can be illustrated. For example, as a fluctuation pattern table used during the second rush, a table for causing a player to appear an effect (a promotion for disapproval) for every 20 fluctuations, which is expected to be promoted to the first rush. use. That is, although based on the use of the fluctuation pattern related to the extremely short time fluctuation (also referred to as "ultra short fluctuation" or "extreme short fluctuation"), 1 for every 20 fluctuation games (in every 20 times), 1 The variation of time is controlled using the variation pattern of several seconds to several tens of seconds defined in the limited frequency pattern table. And, by this limited frequency pattern effect every one time of 20 times, a scribbling effect is performed which can make the player expect development of the effect.

  In addition, the beat effect performed in the twentieth change is the lowest in the beat degree among the subsequent hit effects. In this sense, the tumbling effect of the twentieth change may be content that can not be sensibly "flourish" in terms of the contents of the effect.

  An effect including this one-time turnout effect (it may also be called "mission block", "battle block", "effect block", or "variable block") is shown in FIG. 22 (b-1). The variation pattern tables A to C (shown as “table A” to “table C” in FIG. 22 (b-1)) shown in FIG. Moreover, in the fluctuation game after the 100th time, the fluctuation pattern table D (shown as “table D” in FIG. 22 (b-1)) may be used depending on the gaming state.

  Among these, the fluctuation pattern table A is constituted only by the fluctuation pattern of the ultra-short fluctuation, and does not include the promotion turning effect. And, in the present embodiment, the same thing as the table D (time variation pattern table considered to be normal in the first rush) used as the basic one in the case of the first rush described above or the like in the case of detachment. It is used. Furthermore, as the “effect that does not include the promotion insulting effect” here, it is possible to illustrate the effect of a content that does not start a new mission or battle (also referred to as a mission rush, battle rush, etc.).

  Here, as a modification of the table A, different variation pattern tables used for the second rush and the first rush may be provided, and different ultra-short variation fluctuation pattern tables may be provided. In addition, the number of variation patterns and the number of effect patterns linked to this are made greater than those of the time-to-day variation pattern table used as the basic thing in the first rush, and those related to outreach and promotion effects It may be selectable.

  Subsequently, the fluctuation pattern table B is for presentation (a mission success / rejection presentation or a promotion presentation presentation) for obtaining an expectation of the player for a big hit (normal or definite change). Only one variation pattern may be determined in the variation pattern table B, and only one effect pattern may be associated with the variation pattern defined in the variation pattern table B.

  In addition, the “representation for fulfilling the expectation for a big hit (normal or definite change) (a mission success or failure scintillating effect or a promotion disappointing effect)” means a presentation representing a predetermined mission or battle being started. There is. Furthermore, in this fluctuation pattern table B, fluctuation patterns relating to an effect (or an effect such as an effect to draw) of a content that causes a mission failure or a battle to be defeated are linked.

  FIG. 23A shows an example of a specific aspect according to the fluctuation pattern table B. The fluctuation pattern table B is independent (independent) from the number of reservations and the type of special symbol. In the example of FIG. 23 (a), in the case of the outset shown on the left side in the figure, all the change pattern random numbers (here 0 to 49999) are assigned to the 15 second change pattern, and the change in the case of outset As the variation pattern based on the pattern table B, only 15 seconds is selected. Further, in the case of the hit shown on the right side in the drawing, only the one for 25 seconds is selected as the fluctuation pattern based on the fluctuation pattern table B.

  In addition, it is also possible to provide not only the fluctuation for 15 seconds but also for example a fluctuation for 30 seconds (variation pattern) in the case of an outlier. In this case, it is conceivable to set the storage number to, for example, 4500 to 49999. Then, as an effect based on this relatively long-term fluctuation pattern, for example, a button effect (such as a continuous hit or a single push) is executed after a failure of a mission (or after a battle is lost) It is possible to provide a pattern (such as a revival promotion pattern).

  Furthermore, after the above-mentioned failure (or after defeat etc.), you may provide the revival big hit pattern which may become a big hit via a button effect. In this case, it is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation that "If the button effect appears, it may be hit".

  In addition, there is a possibility that the game state in control has a low probability, and the button effect may be executed even when the promotion effect can not be executed. For this reason, it is conceivable that the button effect is assumed to be one that is not included. Then, when setting it as “Gasse”, an effect (for example, display of “chain”) for prompting the player to hit continuously is performed, and the level of the hit is displayed in the displayed meter (hit meter) along with the hit. It is possible to execute an effect such as the display does not reach the reference value (or the full value).

  In addition, when performing effects that can be developed by a single button operation instead of the effects related to the continuous hit, there is no Gasse, and promotion control such as promotion or hitting is determined by the appearance of button effects It is also possible to carry out using the above-mentioned 30 second fluctuation pattern. In addition, as the effect concerning the fluctuation pattern of this 30 seconds, for example even with the time reduction final fluctuation (the 100th fluctuation), if the button effect appears after the mission failure etc., promotion control or hit will be decided, etc. It is also possible.

  Subsequently, the fluctuation pattern table C is a table for execution of an effect of notifying the transition to the normal state by ending the time saving state when the previous big hit is the normal hit which is the non-probability change. In this variation pattern table C, there is an effect of notifying a ball that has been acquired in a series of specific gaming periods (a so-called consecutive period) after a mission failure, and a content of notifying a big hit by resurrection effect after a mission failure Variation patterns related to the effects are linked. Further, as for the fluctuation pattern table C, as in the case of the fluctuation pattern table B, it is possible to make only one corresponding fluctuation pattern or effect pattern.

  FIG. 23 (a) shows an example of a specific mode according to the fluctuation pattern table C. The variation pattern table C is independent (independent) from the number of reservations and the type of special symbol. In the example of the variation pattern table C in FIG. 23 (a), in the case of the offset shown on the left side in the figure, all variation pattern random numbers (0 to 49999 here) are assigned to the variation pattern of 25 seconds. As a fluctuation pattern based on the fluctuation pattern table B in the case of an out-of-plane, only 25 seconds are selected. Also in the case of the hit shown on the right side of the figure, only the one for 25 seconds is selected as the variation pattern based on the variation pattern table B.

  Subsequently, the fluctuation pattern table D is used in the first rush, is constituted only by the fluctuation pattern of the ultrashort fluctuation, and is similar to the fluctuation pattern table A described above. Then, it is possible to share the fluctuation pattern table A as the fluctuation pattern table D.

  FIG. 23A shows an example of a specific mode according to the fluctuation pattern table D. In the example of the fluctuation pattern table D in FIG. 23A, 95% (0 to 47499) of fluctuation patterns random numbers of 0 to 49999 have a fluctuation pattern of 0.6 seconds in the case of the offset shown on the left side in the drawing. And 2% (47500 to 48499) of the variation pattern random numbers are assigned to the variation pattern of 1 second. In addition, 1.5% (48500 to 49249) of the variation pattern random number is assigned to the variation pattern of 1.5 seconds, and 1% (49250 to 49749) of the variation pattern random number is assigned to the variation pattern of 2 seconds. There is. Furthermore, 0.5% (49750 to 49999) of the variation pattern random numbers are assigned to the variation pattern of 3 seconds.

  In addition, about fluctuation pattern table D concerning the case of outing, it is possible to differ what is used according to the number of reservations, and the kind of special symbol. Then, for example, when the number of reservations in Special Figure 2 is one, a variation pattern table in which the number for a variation pattern of 3.0 seconds is 0 to 049999 is used, and a variation pattern fixed at so-called 3.0 seconds It is possible to Furthermore, when the number of reservations of Special Figure 1 is 1 to 4, it is possible to set the variation display of Special Figure 1 as a variation pattern fixed at 10.0 seconds.

  Further, in the case of the hit shown on the right side of the figure, 10% (0 to 4999) of the variation pattern random number is allocated to the variation pattern of 0.6 seconds, and similarly 10% of the variation pattern random number (5000 to 9999 ) Is assigned to a one second fluctuation pattern. Further, 10% (10000 to 14999) of the variation pattern random numbers are assigned to the variation pattern of 1.5 seconds, and 40% (15000 to 34999) of the variation pattern random numbers are assigned to the variation pattern of 2 seconds. Furthermore, 30% (3500 to 49999) of the variation pattern random numbers are assigned to the variation pattern of 3 seconds.

  Subsequently, an example of an effect example using the above-described variation pattern tables A to D will be described. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 22 (b-2), in the variation game where the number of variations is the first to nineteenth, the variation pattern table A is used, and the variation pattern table B is used at the 20th Be done. Moreover, the fluctuation pattern table A is used at the 21st to 39th times, and the fluctuation pattern table B is used at the 40th time. Furthermore, similarly, the fluctuation pattern table A is used 41 to 59 times, 61 to 79 times, and 81 to 99 times, and the fluctuation pattern table B is used on the 60th and 80th times.

  Also, at the 100th time, the variation pattern table B (at the time of definite variation) or the variation pattern table C (at the time of non-determination variation) is used. Then, after the 101st time, if the variation is in progress, the variation pattern table D is used. If the variation is not in progress, the variation pattern table related to the normal mode is used.

  Here, when the promotion effect to a definite change is performed at the 40th rotation, the 60th rotation, or the 80th rotation, for example, the limited frequency table (here, the variation pattern table) according to the symbol (here, the special symbol) of the big hit It is also possible to refer to the above-mentioned fluctuation pattern table D for ultrashort fluctuation from the time of the 41st, 61st, 81st, etc. subsequent fluctuation using C). It is a specification that is determined based on the jackpot symbol as shown in FIG. 22 (b-3) to determine from what fluctuation the table D is to be referred to when the probability variation hit is made, but it is a symbol Other elements may be used, for example, the number of consecutive units, the gaming state (the first rush to the third rush, etc.) at the time of the last big hit, etc. It may be.

  Further, the above-mentioned fluctuation pattern table A is not common to the fluctuation pattern table for the first rush, and further, as the fluctuation pattern table A, fluctuation pattern tables A, A ′ (A dash), A ′ ′ (A2 dash) , A ′ ′ ′ (Aceley Dash) or the like may be provided.

  For example, FIG. 23 (b-1) shows an example of a variation pattern table A that is not common to the variation pattern table for the first rush as a modification. The variation pattern table A can be used when the number of reservations of Special Figure 2 is 2 to 4. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 23 (b-1), in the case of the detachment shown on the left side in the figure, 60% (0 to 29999) of the variation patterns of 0 to 49999 are 1.0 seconds. It is assigned, and 24.5% (30000 to 42249) of the variation pattern random number is assigned to the variation pattern of 2.0 seconds. Here, in the case where the number of reservations is one, for example, it is conceivable to set a fluctuation pattern fixed at 10 seconds as described above.

  Also, 10.5% (42250 to 47499) of the variation pattern random numbers are assigned to the variation pattern of 3.0 seconds, and 4% (47500 to 49499) of the variation pattern random numbers are assigned to the variation pattern of 7.0 seconds It is done. Furthermore, 1% (49500 to 49999) of the variation pattern random numbers are assigned to the variation pattern of 15 seconds.

  In the case of the variation pattern table A pertaining to outliers as shown in FIG. 23 (b-1), when the number of reservations in Special Figure 1 is 1 to 4, the variation in Special Figure 1 is 10.0. It is possible to use a variation pattern table in which the storage number for a variation pattern of 0 seconds is 0 to 49999, and to obtain a variation pattern fixed at so-called 10.0 seconds.

  Furthermore, regarding the variation pattern of 15.0 seconds described above, if the gaming state is highly probable (high probability state) when the command related to the variation pattern is received on the sub side (sub main board 301 side), It is possible to adopt a control mode in which it is randomly selected whether or not to execute a successful effect (such as an effect that a mission is successful or a battle is won).

  Furthermore, in the case of the hit shown on the right side of the figure, 0.5% (0 to 249) of the variation pattern random numbers is assigned to the variation pattern of 3.0 seconds, and 19.5% of the variation pattern random numbers ( 250 to 9999) are assigned to a variation pattern of 7.0 seconds. Further, 80% (10000 to 49999) of the variation pattern random numbers are assigned to the variation pattern of 25.0 seconds.

  In addition, it is promoted in the reach production which becomes reach about change pattern table A in the case of such a hit, and it is promoted by success of a mission etc., and a big hit is decided when a resurrection production as mentioned above is performed. It is possible to perform presentation control. And in this case, if it is a normal reach, it is possible to perform presentation control in the mode that there may be both the case of winning and the case of losing. Furthermore, it is conceivable to execute the development reach of the development reach (for example, the one that recovers from a failure of a mission and develops to a big hit) with respect to the fluctuation pattern of 25.0 seconds described above.

  Further, FIG. 23 (b-2) shows an example of the aforementioned A ′ (A dash). In the example shown in FIG. 23 (b-2), in the case of the outset shown on the left side in the figure, 60% (0 to 29999) of the variation patterns of 0 to 49999 are allocated to the variation pattern of 1.0 seconds. 24.5% (30000 to 42249) of the variation pattern random numbers are assigned to the variation pattern of 2.0 seconds. Further, 15.5% (42250 to 49999) of the variation pattern random numbers are allocated to the variation pattern of 3.0 seconds.

  In the case of the variation pattern table A ′ related to the outset, as shown in FIG. 23 (b-2), when the number of reservations of Special Figure 1 is 1 to 4, the variation of Special Figure 1 is 10 . It is possible to use a variation pattern table in which the number of units for a variation pattern of 0 seconds is 0 to 49999, and to obtain a variation pattern fixed at so-called 10.0 seconds.

  Also, in the case shown in the right side of the figure, 20% (0 to 9999) of the variation pattern random numbers are assigned to the variation patterns of 7.0 seconds, and 80% (10000 to 49999) of the variation pattern random numbers. Is assigned to the fluctuation pattern of 15.0 seconds.

  In addition, about fluctuation pattern table A 'in the case of such a hit, it is possible to perform presentation control in the aspect of becoming a big hit decision if it becomes reach. Furthermore, it is conceivable to execute the development reach of the development reach (for example, the one that recovers from a failure of a mission and develops to a big hit) for the fluctuation pattern of 15.0 seconds described above.

  In this case, for example, in order to obtain an expectation for the probability change promotion during the short time, a plurality of types are provided according to the type of character, the content of the mission, the content of the battle, etc., and each variation pattern table A1 to A3 etc. It is possible to assign these effects and make it possible to vary the selection ratio of the variation pattern tables A1 to A3 etc., and the appearance frequency of the characters, missions, battles etc. assigned to the variation pattern tables A1 to A3 etc. Become. Then, it is possible to provide a variety of effects such as providing a character that is likely to produce an effect that raises the expectation of the probability change promotion, a character that is difficult to come out, or a character that is determined to hit when reach is applied.

  Also, in the present embodiment, the ultrashort variation (for example, the 0.6 second variation or the 1.0 second variation of the variation pattern table A or D) during the short time is selected at a ratio (for example, 97% or more) close to 100%. Even if it is a fluctuation that will be a big hit, it is a pattern in about 0.6 seconds to 3 seconds without performing an effect that does not prolong the fluctuation time, and an effect of reaching that aligns the left and right rendering symbols (190a, 190c) It is also possible to provide an effect to be determined. In the aspect shown in the modification (for example, in the case of the table A (modification) in FIG. 23 (b-1)), it is also possible to perform an effect that a fluctuation pattern of about 0.6 seconds to about one minute or more may be selected. It is possible.

  Moreover, it is also possible to make presentation control which concerns on 2nd rush as follows. For example, the symbol (special symbol) that generated the fourth big hit (mission bonus) is the symbol (10R positive variation symbol, 10R normal symbol) corresponding to 10R big hit, 10R positive variation symbol 1 to 4 as this 10R positive variation symbol, It is assumed that five types of 10R normal are provided as a 10R normal symbol.

  FIG. 22 (b-3) outlines the flow of effects during the time in the second rush in the case of hitting the 10R positive odds symbols 1 to 4 and 10R normal symbols during the specific game (first to third rushes) Is shown. The case of winning during the specific game is a description on the assumption that the game based on the special figure 2 is performed during the specific game in the gaming machine of this embodiment, and the second not intended in the normal state Even when the player wins by a change based on entry to the starting opening, it is similarly controlled to the second rush.

First, as a common effect when the winning symbol is a 10R probability symbol 1 to 4 or 10R normal symbol, a variation pattern table A defining a predetermined variation pattern is used from the first variation to the 19th variation Display that suggests the contents of the effect to be executed for the first effect period of 21 to 40 variations, the second effect period of 41 to 60 variations, the third effect period of 61 to 80 variations, and the fourth effect period of 81 to 100 variations Make a presentation. Specifically, an effect in which one or more randomly join one or more characters among the plurality of characters that are allys of the main character is displayed. In addition, when the variation pattern tables A and D described above as a modification are not common, the effect to be merged is displayed according to the selection mode of the variation pattern table (the order in which A, A ', etc. are referred) It may be As in the case of the above-mentioned fluctuation pattern table A, this fluctuation pattern table A is an ultra-short fluctuation in which an effect pattern including no promoted turning effect is linked.

  Furthermore, in the case of the 20th variable game, the fluctuation pattern table B for the promotion turning effect is used. As described above, this fluctuation pattern table B is linked with a presentation pattern including a presentation (a mission success / failure presentation or a promotion inclining production) for obtaining an expectation for a big hit (normal or definite change). In the present embodiment, even in the case of the 10R probability variation symbol 1 which is an example of shifting to the selection state of the fluctuation pattern table D at the fastest, it is a change after the 41 fluctuation. This is because, as described above, the 20 changes after the start of the second rush are set to the subsequent presentation suggestion period (the period that suggests which character's mission presentation is to be output), and in the 20th variation, The variation pattern table B is used to select the variation for executing the promotion roaring, but in the 20th variation, the ally characters who joined join the rendering in the first rendering period to the fourth rendering period. It is a variation in which the player is notified of a display such as whether to execute or not.

  Furthermore, from the 21st fluctuation to the 39th fluctuation, a fluctuation pattern table A ′ in which a predetermined fluctuation pattern is defined is used. The fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation pattern table A ′ is the same as the fluctuation pattern table A described above. And this fluctuation pattern of fluctuation pattern table A 'is for executing the production pattern which showed the situation of the execution process and the battle of a mission.

  Furthermore, at the time of the 40th change, the above-mentioned change pattern table B is used, and a promotion effect of executing a mission or winning a battle is executed. Furthermore, at the 41st and subsequent fluctuations, the above-mentioned fluctuation pattern table D is used.

  Subsequently, when the winning symbol is the 10R definite variation symbol 2, from the first variation to the 19th variation, the same effect as that of the 10R probability variation 1 is executed. Furthermore, in the case of the 20th fluctuation game, as in the case of the 10R probability variation symbol 1, the fluctuation pattern table B for the promotion turning effect is used, and from the 21st fluctuation to the 39th fluctuation, the above-mentioned The variation pattern A 'is used. In addition, at the time of the 40th change, a change pattern table in which the effect pattern of the content that fails in the mission or battle is associated is used. In the present embodiment, the fluctuation pattern table selected at the 40th fluctuation is the fluctuation pattern table B, and the failing fluctuation pattern is common to the successful fluctuation pattern table (same 1 fluctuation), and in the sub main CPU When making the effect determination, it is controlled to take out a failure according to the symbol of the previous big hit. If you want to make the presentation time different for success and failure (for example, if you perform the action of the movable character or the decision character image effect of the main character and the ally character after success), the fluctuation pattern table B on the main substrate side It is also possible to execute by providing a success pattern B ′ and a failure pattern B ′ ′.

  Furthermore, at the time of the 41st fluctuation to the 59th fluctuation, a fluctuation pattern table A ′ ′ in which a predetermined fluctuation pattern is defined is used. The fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation pattern table A ′ ′ is the same as the fluctuation pattern tables A and A ′ described above for the fluctuation time. And the variation pattern of this variation pattern table A ′ ′ is such that the effect pattern representing the execution process of the mission and the state of the battle is executed in a mode different from the above-mentioned variation pattern tables A and A ′. There is.

  Furthermore, at the time of the 60th fluctuation, the above-mentioned fluctuation pattern table B is used, and a promotion effect of executing a mission or winning a battle is executed. Furthermore, at the 61st fluctuation, the above-mentioned fluctuation pattern table D is used.

  Subsequently, when the winning symbol is a 10R definite variation symbol 3, the first change to the 59th variation is the same as the case of the 10R positive variation symbol 2. Then, at the time of the 60th fluctuation, the same fluctuation pattern table E as that for the 40th is used, and the rendering of the content that fails in the mission or the battle is executed.

  Furthermore, at the time of the 61st fluctuation to the 79th fluctuation, a fluctuation pattern table A ′ ′ ′ in which a predetermined fluctuation pattern is defined is used. The fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation pattern table A ′ ′ ′ is the same as the fluctuation pattern tables A, A ′, and A ′ ′ described above for the fluctuation time. Then, in the variation pattern of the variation pattern table A ′ ′ ′, an effect pattern representing the process of execution of a mission and the appearance of a battle is executed in a mode different from the above-mentioned variation pattern tables A, A ′ and A ′ ′. It has become.

  Furthermore, at the time of the 80th fluctuation, the above-mentioned fluctuation pattern table B is used, and a promotion effect of executing a mission or winning a battle is executed. Furthermore, at the 81st fluctuation, the above-mentioned fluctuation pattern table D is used.

  Subsequently, when the winning symbol is the 10R definite variation symbol 4, the first change to the 79th variation is the same as the case of the 10R positive variation symbol 3. Then, at the time of the 80th change, the same change pattern table B as the 40th and 60th times is used, and the rendering of the content that fails the mission or the battle is executed.

  Furthermore, at the time of the change from the 81st change to the 99th change, a change pattern table A ′ ′ ′ (afo dash) in which a predetermined change pattern is defined is used. The fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation pattern table A ′ ′ ′ ′ is the same as the fluctuation pattern table A, A ′, A ′ ′, A ′ ′ ′ described above for the fluctuation time. And, the variation patterns of this variation pattern table A ′ ′ ′ ′ show the process of execution of the mission and the appearance of the battle in a mode different from the above-mentioned variation pattern tables A, A ′, A ′ ′, A ′ ′ ′. The effect pattern is to be executed.

  Furthermore, at the time of the 100th fluctuation, the above-mentioned fluctuation pattern table B is used, and a promotion effect of executing a mission or winning a battle is executed. Furthermore, at the 101st fluctuation, the fluctuation pattern table D described above is used.

  Subsequently, when the winning symbol is a 10R normal symbol, the first to 99th variations are the same as in the case of the 10R positive variation symbol 4. Then, at the time of the 100th fluctuation, the fluctuation pattern table C is used, and the rendering of the content that fails in the mission or the battle is executed. At this time, the specific gaming state ends, and the so-called continuous state ends, so it is in the case of failure production (representation such as mission failure or battle defeat) how many balls were obtained during the advantageous period Output after completion. Then, the game mode falls from the time saving mode and shifts to the normal mode, and from the 101st time, the fluctuation pattern table for the normal probability change mode is used.

  In addition, although 10R positive variation and 10R normal occurrence effect control during time saving is described, for example, 7R big hit, 5R big hit (special figure 1) and the like also regarding the production control during short time It is possible to adopt the control mode of

  In the second rush, as described above, it is possible to perform an effect (merging effect) in which allied characters join. For example, the variation game every 20 times is regarded as one block, and in the first to 20th blocks (the first variation block), an effect representing that an allied character joins the player character is executed. Furthermore, the 21st to 40th blocks (second variation block), the 41st to 60th blocks (third variation block), the 61st to 80th blocks (fourth variation block), and the 81st to 100th In the block (fifth variable block), effects such as a mission and a battle are performed according to the joining character.

  Here, in the effect pattern according to the variation pattern of the ultra-short variation, it may be considered that it is difficult to express the state of merging of allied characters in one variation. In such a case, a variation of about several seconds is caused by representing the state of merging across a plurality of ultrashort variations (for example, 5 variations) or in the middle of the 15th, 35th, 50th, etc. It is conceivable to apply a limited frequency pattern having time. Furthermore, it is also conceivable that the joining character is made to appear from the fluctuation before the fluctuation where the joining state is shown (the front fluctuation).

  Moreover, it is also possible to provide multiple types of ally characters joining. Then, for example, it is possible to provide the variation pattern table as different as the above-mentioned variation pattern table A, A ′ to A ′ ′ ′ and the like, and assign different friend characters to each variation pattern table. The friend character in this case can be said to be in accordance with the variation pattern table. In the above example, the variation pattern tables A to A ′ ′ ′ ′ are output in order, but the reference order may be made different depending on conditions such as the big hit symbol, or the same variation pattern table may be referred to plurally. May be

  Furthermore, it is also possible to set different ally characters as, for example, six types of ally characters A to F, and to have different expectations regarding time continuity, effect development, jackpot, etc., relating to these ally characters A to F. Then, the allies characters A to F always become big hit if they develop into reach conditions Allies characters (characters to be shown in the fluctuation pattern table A 'in FIG. 23 (b-1)), a predetermined fluctuation pattern table (the characters It is possible to provide an ally character or the like that appears only at the time of presentation by a limited frequency table or the like.

  In addition, when a scout effect is performed based on a variation selected at a timing other than the variation (variation based on the variation pattern table B) occurring at every 20 times the mission, battle, etc. (FIG. 23 (b-3) It is also possible to provide a teammate character that always succeeds in the fluctuation pattern tables A to A ′ ′ ′ ′ of 15.0 seconds, etc.). For example, it is possible to select a variation pattern that can perform the promotion rendition effect even if it is not a variation of every 20 divisions but a midway variation between the divisions, and it is executed for the pre-reading effect or the variation under execution If a predetermined character (such as the above-mentioned strongest ally character) appears in the preview effect being performed, it is also possible to produce an effect such as transition to a promotion turning effect, for example. By doing this, it is possible to effectively perform the turning effect without monotonizing the appearance interval of the turning effect.

  Further, as another modification, when a specific variation pattern is selected in the above-mentioned variation block, an effect (a branch effect or the like may be performed) as to whether or not various promotion effects are to be performed. Can be illustrated. Then, in this branch effect, after a failure or defeat, an ally character appears anew, and when all the ally characters of a predetermined number (for example, the same five as the number of variable blocks) fail or lose, etc. And battle etc. can be exemplified.

  In addition, the promotion effect is output before shifting to the selection state of the fluctuation pattern table D in the main control means, and when it is originally in the selection state of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the second rush, the command according to the above-mentioned fluctuation pattern table B Can be illustrated based on the difference as to whether the game mode is the first rush or the second rush when the sub main substrate 301 receives the command. For example, in the first rush, it is changed to the promotion stumbling effect in the second rush, and it is determined whether or not there is a big hit in the hold existing at the time of reception of the command related to the fluctuation pattern table B, and a specific advance notice occurs. It is possible to display whether or not it is displayed (by making the strongest allied character approach and stay on the screen, a presentation that suggests a big hit in the hold etc.).

  In the second rush, if the previous big hit was a definite big hit, the last character to appear must always succeed in a mission or battle, and if it was usually a big hit, all characters that appeared were It can illustrate things such as mission and battle failure. Furthermore, it is also possible to perform such an effect in a battle effect during a special game.

  Furthermore, if the fluctuation is a hit that makes a big hit in the fluctuation (the 20th fluctuation in each fluctuation block, the fluctuation in the middle, etc.), the display mode of the success of the mission or battle is promoted to the usual first rush It is possible to make it different from the time. For example, it is suggested that there is a mode of success without failure on the way (normal success) and an aspect of success after recovery once (resurrection success), and in the case of normal success, it will be a big hit transitioning to the first rush In the case of the resurrection success, it can be exemplified that it simply suggests that one of the jackpots will be made.

  Also, as another effect mode, when the joining character succeeds in the mission or battle, it is suggested to shift to the first rush or become a big hit, and the main character appears from the middle in a situation where the main character is not appearing If you succeed in missions or battles, you may be suggesting that it will just be a big hit, or it will be a 15R probability variation big hit. Furthermore, it is possible to illustrate a presentation mode in which even if the main character appears, the mission or battle fails, and the player can not relatively receive the benefit.

  Moreover, it is also possible to make the strongest allies characters as described above appear in the pre-reading effect in the variable game. In this case, for example, it is possible to illustrate the effect control in a mode in which a probability variation jackpot occurs at a rate of 90% or more when the strongest ally character appears.

  Furthermore, it is determined whether there is a hold (big hit hold) that will be a big hit in the hold only in the predetermined case, information of the big hit is stored, and a production other than the intense heat character (strongest alligator character) is scheduled In a situation where it has been done, it is also conceivable to execute a rendition (alternate rendition) that causes the intense heat character to be interrupted as a predetermined pre-reading effect that suggests that a big hit will be made at a high rate. And in this case, it may be considered that a big hit is made at a rate of 100% (so-called big hit notification without a gap).

  Further, as the “predetermined case” for performing the above-mentioned effect, for example, when the pre-reading effect is executed over a period in which the fluctuation based on the current suspension straddles the above-mentioned fluctuation block, ie, a period reaching the end of the fluctuation block (for example, The 17th to 20th fluctuations of the fluctuation block or the last fluctuation game of fluctuation blocks (for example, the 20th fluctuation of fluctuation blocks) can be exemplified. It can be said that such pre-reading effect is pre-reading effect which is drawn only in the limited period in the vicinity of the timing (final fluctuation and the like of fluctuation block and the like) to the effect with the restriction frequency pattern. Also, it is possible to prevent such effects from being performed for the final change (for example, the 20th of 100 times) or the last block (for example, 100th of 100 times) in the first variable block. It is. Moreover, when performing the above-mentioned alternative presentation by 1st rush, since it is not decided that there is a suspension of hit, it can also be illustrated that it does not become a 100% big hit announcement.

  Furthermore, for the aforementioned A ′ ′ (A-to-Dash) to A ′ ′ ′ ′ ′ (A-for-Dash), etc., effects are performed according to the characteristics of characters appearing in the first rush, such as A ′ (A-Dash). It is possible. For example, it is possible to adopt a control mode in which the selection rate of 15.0 seconds (promotion rotation fluctuation performing promotion rotation production) is higher than A. In this case, it is easy to select a failure effect (effect such as a mission failure or battle defeat) on the side of the sub main board 301. Also, conversely, it is possible to adopt a control mode in which the selectivity of 15.0 seconds is lower than A. In this case, it becomes easy to select a successful effect. Furthermore, when reaching, it is possible to select the fluctuation pattern of about one minute or so as described above.

<Summary of effects pertaining to the third rush>
Next, the effects relating to the aforementioned third rush will be described. First, in the present embodiment, the third rush is a mode (sub mode) in which battle is defeated in the round effect at the time of the big hit according to the special figure 2, and it is shifted after the special game per 5R regular game. The third rush is a mode in which it is definitely informed that 100 variations are performed with a low probability and a high base state (low probability high base). When time saving is added to the normal touch of the special figure 1 as in the present embodiment, it is possible to set the time saving mode to the third rush.

With regard to the effect pattern, in this embodiment, it is possible to give the player an impression that it is almost the same as the first rush. More specifically, it is possible to make the background image different to a different extent so that the characters and the game frequency are the same as in the first rush. Furthermore, the limited frequency pattern in which the fluctuation time is relatively longer than the fluctuation pattern of the ultrashort fluctuation of about 0.6 seconds can be selected only for the final fluctuation (100th time). For example, it is conceivable that, at the 100th time, the above-mentioned fluctuation pattern table C is used, and for the other fluctuations, the above-mentioned fluctuation pattern table D (or fluctuation pattern table A) is used.
<Measures to special figure 1 special big hit>

  In the pachinko gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, one of the basic game flows is that after the above-described first hit, a big hit according to the special figure 2 occurs in the first rush that is the specific gaming state. However, it is also conceivable that the game progresses from the progress of the game according to such basic game development. For example, there is a start winning prize pertaining to the special view 1 in the specific gaming state after the special game pertaining to the first hit, and a variable effect for the big hit of the special view 1 during the specific game, an effect during the special game ( It may be possible to perform a round effect). In addition, when the above-mentioned first hit according to the special figure 1 already contains the information to be the big hit according to the special figure 1 in the reserve storage information, the big hit according to the special figure 1 during the first rush It will occur.

  Such a situation can be considered as a special situation, and the big hit pertaining to the special figure 1 in the special situation can be referred to as "special figure 1 special big hit" or "per accident". And, about the big hit concerning Special Figure 1, if there is a difference such as the presence or absence of time, the number of times, the presence or absence of electric chew support (power support), the number of times, etc., the situation is not taken. It is also possible that the production which is not suitable for is performed and the interest is spoiled. Therefore, in the present embodiment, measures are taken in the case where such special figure 1 special big hit occurs, and these measures will be described below by taking an example.

  First, in the present embodiment, the first big hit (mission bonus), the second big hit (hyper bonus), and the third big hit (probability) are provided as the big hit of the special figure 1. And, when these big hits occur as special figure 1 special big hits, specified control is done according to the kind of big hit which it occurs like below. In addition, below, when the 2nd big hit (hyper bonus) occurs as a special figure 1 special big hit, when the 3rd big hit (probable) occurs, it explains in order of the case where the 1st big hit (mission bonus) occurred. .

  For example, when the special figure 1 special big hit is the above-mentioned second big hit (hyper bonus), the same effect as the big hit in the special figure 2 is selected and executed. . More specifically, when a second big hit (hyper bonus) occurs as the special figure 1 special big hit, the effect during the special game (round effect) is different from the above-mentioned round effect at the fourth hit, The same effect as the round effect at the second big hit (hyper bonus) is executed. However, at the time of the game after the end of the special game, the same effect as the first rush is to be executed. That is, since the second big hit (hyper bonus) is 15R certainty, by performing such effect control, it is possible to prevent the player from holding a sense of discomfort by the effect according to the special figure 1 special big hit. There is.

  Here, examples of the “same effect” may be an entirely the same effect or an effect produced to give the player a similar impression or atmosphere. In addition, it is conceivable to share the special pattern 2 with the special pattern, or to separately provide the same special pattern as the special figure 2 for special drawing 1 in the production. In order to prevent the "special figure 1 special big hit" mentioned above, it is preferable to keep the time of fluctuation of the special figure 1 for a long time. In addition, most of the effects in the first rush are performed based on the fluctuation pattern of the extremely short fluctuation time as described above, but as the effects after the special game with the special figure 1 special jackpot, the number of fluctuation (number of games) It is possible to perform the same effect as the first rush by limiting the In addition, in the game flow shown in FIG. 19, when winning a 5R normal big hit in the big hit of the special figure 1, the number of time saving games was set to 0, but in the specific game, the special figure 1 special big hit was drawn If the time saving game is not given, the degree of disadvantage increases too much. In order to prevent such a thing, when a special figure 1 special big hit is a big hit normally, the specific game which is a time-saving number of times of 100 times is granted, for example. In addition, although the number of times of time saving (here, 100 times) is set to the same level as that of the special figure 2, it is conceivable to set the number of times smaller than that. Furthermore, the number of times of variation in which the same effect as the third rush is performed may be set according to the number of times of time reduction (such as 100 times or less than 100 times) given for the special figure 1.

  Then, when the special figure 1 special big hit is the above-mentioned 3rd big hit (suspense), it is possible to shorten the time of the big hit start demonstration and the end demonstration as much as possible based on being a specific game state. As the time of the big hit start demonstration and the end demonstration at this time, for example, it can be exemplified that the time is close to 0 without limit (for example, about 0.1 to 1 second).

  Then, when the third big hit (probable) occurs in this way, it is possible that the player can start and end the special game without making it conspicuous because the player can not expect the benefits from the special game. Then, as the effect in this situation, for example, during the special game, the effect pattern 190 at the time of the decision stop is continuously displayed while being stopped (fixed display), and on the screen of the effect display device 60 It is possible to perform display (such as band display) such as “Medium” and “Please wait for a while”.

  In addition, when the rendering pattern 190 is fixedly displayed, it is conceivable to set the coloring of the rendering pattern 190 to, for example, gray, which is not normally used, to perform an effect indicating that it is a rare special situation. By doing this, it is possible to give the player the impression that it is a kind of freeze effect by the effect. Then, it is possible to have the player wait for the transition to the first rush without making the player feel uncomfortable.

  Subsequently, when the special figure 1 special big hit is the above-mentioned first big hit (mission bonus), the above-mentioned fourth big hit (in place of the presentation representing whether or not the mission described above succeeds) The same round effect is performed as when a battle bonus occurs. Here, on presentation, sharing the fourth round hit and the round hit pattern of the big hit (battle bonus), and separately providing the double hit side playing pattern for the same place as the fourth big hit (battle bonus) And so on.

  Furthermore, at the time of the end demonstration concerning the special game in this case, if the first big hit (mission bonus) is a definite change hit, the victory effect representing the victory which relates to the battle is executed, furthermore it moves to the aforementioned 1st rush The first rush rush effect is executed to indicate that. On the other hand, when the first big hit (mission bonus) is the normal hit, at the end demonstration, a defeat effect representing a defeat relating to the battle is executed, and a third rush rush effect is executed.

  Thus, with regard to the big hit (not limited to the third big hit (probable)) according to the special figure 1, the difference from the big hit of the special figure 2 may be provided for the presence or absence of time reduction and the aspect and matter of time short However, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling discomfort by applying the above-described measures to these differences for the special figure 1 special jackpot during the specific game.

  Furthermore, the special figure 1 special on the basis of the fact that the big hit according to the special figure 1 may be different from the big hit time according to the special figure 2, such as falling to a normal state etc. It is possible to perform the round production at the time of the big hit as follows. For example, as a round effect when the first big hit (mission bonus) occurs as the special figure 1 special big hit, the same effect as the round effect at the fourth big hit (battle bonus) as well as the big hit according to the special figure 2 Run. In this case, the first jackpot can be referred to as a battle bonus different from the fourth jackpot.

  Then, for example, the main character performs an effect of fighting a predetermined character not selected at the big hit according to the special figure 2 or an effect of fighting only the strongest or the strongest class among the enemies which can be selected at the big hit of the special figure 2 . Further, among the above, in the production to fight against the enemy of the strongest or the strongest class, for example, adding a band display such as "DANGER" or "DEAD or ALIVE" or performing probability display that becomes definite variation in the start demonstration Conceivable. In the present embodiment, the probability that the first jackpot is a definite variation (the first probability variation) is the same (35%) as the probability that it will not be a definite variation as described above, so that the probability variation probability is 50% For example, it is conceivable to perform display such as "50: 50 BATTLE" or the like. In addition, the winning rate in the battle bonus in the special figure 2 is 75% because it is the case where the big hit to shift to the first rush and the second rush is subtracted, and it is better to win the big hit in the special figure 2 than the special figure 1 It is easy to be in the situation where victory production can be executed.

  In addition, as a modification, the fluctuation effect is executed that becomes a big hit with the presence or absence of the electric cheering support (power support) after the special game by the normal hit (here, the 5R normal with the first big hit) according to the special figure 1 You may divide according to the game state of the occasion. For example, if a big hit occurs when the gaming state is normally without power support, then no power support is added after the special game, and if a big hit occurs when the power support is with power support, 100 after the special game It is possible to adopt a control mode such as adding power supply over the fluctuation of the time. Furthermore, since the symbol distribution in this case (assignment of the symbol ratio to be a symbol and a normal hit pattern) is 50: 50 as described above, the aforementioned "DANGER", "DEAD or ALIVE", etc. It is possible to display “50:50 BATTLE” and the probability of becoming a probability change in the start demonstration.

  In addition, with regard to the 5R round effect, it is conceivable to execute an effect representing success or failure as a result of a mission or an outcome as a result of a battle as a 5R-th effect which is the final round, but it is not limited thereto. , It is possible to perform an effect (result effect) representing the result of a mission or a battle on the 4th R or the like before the final round. And when it does in this way, after presentation of a result, the period for performing the presentation after a result comes out can be ensured using the period containing 5 R eyes.

  Furthermore, this makes it possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which an effective presentation period can not be performed due to an excessively short presentation possible period after the result is obtained. In addition, even if the 5th R is finished in a relatively short time, it is possible to perform the presentation after the result is obtained for a sufficient time as compared with the case where the result is presented in the 5th R. Also, for example, the result that appears in the fourth-R effect is that of positive content such as success or victory, and when the appearance timing of the effect representing the result (result effect) is carried over to the fifth R, be sure to It is also possible to adopt a control mode in which an effect with negative content such as failure or defeat is executed (or at a high rate close to 100%). In this way, in order to avoid winning and losing carry over to the 5Rs being determined to be defeated, the big hit end demo based on the gaming state (when it is in the specific gaming state) when 5R normal (first big hit) of special figure 1 is won It may be controlled to increase the time of

Moreover, as a condition where such a special big hit occurs, the above-mentioned second rush, third rush, etc. can also be mentioned. When the first big hit and the second big hit are obtained in the second and third rushes, the same control as in the first rush is performed. On the other hand, when the third big hit (probability) occurs in the special big hit, then the variation pattern tables B and C are not referred to, and inconvenience may occur, for example, during the special game. As the effect, it can be considered that a self character such as a main character appears to perform a probability change promotion effect.
<The production aspect which affects the 4th big hit which uses list production>
<< Overview of list production >>

  Next, another embodiment of the effect relating to the above-described fourth jackpot will be described based on the drawings. FIG. 24 shows the flow of the gaming state including the fourth big hit according to the present embodiment, and the same description is made on the same portions as the flow of the gaming state according to the above-mentioned embodiment (see FIG. 19) ing. Here, parts different from the above-described embodiment will be mainly described, and the description of the same parts will be omitted.

  In the present embodiment shown in FIG. 24, as in the previous embodiment (FIG. 19), battle effects (round battle effects) are executed as effects during the fourth big hit, and other than this, battle effects are performed. There are cases where it is not possible. In FIG. 24, illustration is abbreviate | omitted about the 4th big hit in, when battle production is not performed. Furthermore, in FIG. 24, the 4th big hit when the battle effect is executed is shown as "battle bonus".

  In the example shown in FIG. 24, when the battle rendition (round battle rendition) according to the fourth big hit is executed, the battle rendition is a normal hit which does not become a definite change whether the generated fourth hit is a definite change which becomes a definite change It is possible to show the distinction between (here, "per defeat"). In this case, the probability variation probability variation is classified into "1 per unit" or "2 per configuration" according to the type thereof, and a normal variation not becoming a probability variation is defined as a "loss per defeat".

  Also, the battle effect of the present embodiment can be performed as a round effect, and can also be performed at a stage (such as a reach stage) of the variable effect before the round effect is performed. For example, when a battle effect is executed as a round effect, the player can determine that a big hit has occurred by the start of the battle, and further, depending on the result of the subsequent battle, the type of the big hit hit Can be determined.

  On the other hand, when the battle effect is executed before the round effect (during the fluctuation effect), the battle effect is executed, for example, during reach. Then, it is possible to make it possible to determine whether or not the player has hit the big hit according to the result of the battle. Also, for example, when the main character wins the battle, the player wins a jackpot of a type with relatively large profit for the player, and if the main character loses the battle or the victory of the main character is not determined If the situation continues, it is also possible to adopt an effect control mode in which the player wins a jackpot of a type with relatively small profit.

  Among the fourth big hits in the present embodiment, the fourth big hit (battle bonus) where a battle effect (round battle effect) is performed as a round effect is 15R positive variation, 10R positive variation, 7R positive variation, 5R positive variation as shown in FIG. , Has become one of the 5R normal. Among these, the 15R positive variation corresponds to the above-mentioned "per one". And, in the present embodiment, the 15R certainty variation is a type of big hit where the player can obtain the largest number of winning balls (maximum amount of balls).

  In addition, 10R positive variation, 7R positive variation, and 5R positive variation, which are other probability variations, correspond to the above-mentioned "2". Furthermore, 5R usually corresponds to the above-mentioned "defeat defeat", and in the case of winning this "defeat defeat", for example, the presentation of the content that the main character and ally characters lose in battle is executed. . And, in the present embodiment, when the fourth big hit is "one hit", the gaming state after the end of the special game becomes the above-mentioned first rush, as shown in FIG. In addition, when the 4th big hit becomes “2 per hit”, the game state after the end of the special game becomes definite change and time reduction. Furthermore, if the fourth jackpot is a "loss hit", the gaming state after the end of the special game will be short.

  The ratio of "per 1", "per 2" and "loss big hit" mentioned above is 50% for "1", 15% for "2" and 35% for "loss big hit" There is. And these ratios are decided by the ratio (pattern ratio) of the big hit symbol as mentioned above, and distribution (round distribution) of the round at the time of big hit is also decided by the ratio (symbol ratio) of the big hit symbol.

  In the fourth big hit battle rendition (round battle rendition), although the self character and the ally character fight against the enemy character, as a part of various battle rendition, for example, the self character, the ally character, And, it is possible to employ one that develops as if a large number of characters including enemy characters are fighting in the battle royal (or battle royal) type.

  Furthermore, in this type of battle rendition, it is possible to make any character initially appear as a person who can survive to the end (herein referred to as "final winner candidate") in terms of rendition. However, with the development of the battle, those who lost (here referred to as "the losers") are sequentially excluded from the final winner candidates, and the kind corresponding to the last winner (here, referred to as the "final winner") It is possible to generate a definite big hit.

  Furthermore, during the battle effect of the present embodiment, a character list effect (hereinafter referred to as "list effect") may be executed to display a list of characters. In this list effect, as shown in FIGS. 25 (a) and 25 (b), the list display area 201 is superimposed and displayed on a predetermined portion (lower center or the like) in the screen of the effect display device 60. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 25A, a rendering state display area 206, a big hit gaming state display area 207, a message display area 208, and a right-handed display area 209 are displayed.

  In the list display area 201 of the display areas shown in FIG. 25 (a), as shown in FIG. 25 (b), four first index display portions 202a to 202d and eight characters are displayed from the top to the bottom. The units 203a to 203h and eight second index display units 204a to 204h are also provided. The details of these will be described later, but the uppermost first index display portions 202a to 202d group characters by grouping based on a predetermined first index (here, probability change expectation).

  In addition, the character display portions 203a to 203h are regions for displaying eight characters A to H individually. Furthermore, the second index display portions 204a to 204h indicate predetermined second indices (here, the amount of balls) for the respective characters A to H (see FIG. 25B).

  Here, in FIGS. 25A and 25B, letters A to H are shown together with the characters in each of the character display portions 203a to 203h so that the characters A to H can be easily distinguished in the figure. Further, in FIG. 25B, the alphabets A to H in the character display portions 203a to 203h are made to the right in the character display portions 203a to 203h so as to avoid other symbols and leader lines.

  Subsequently, the details of the first index display portions 202a to 202d, the character display portions 203a to 203h, and the second index display portions 204a to 204h described above will be described. First, the character display portions 203a to 203h will be described here.

  Different types (eight types) of characters are displayed on each of the character display portions 203a to 203h. In the present embodiment, the characters displayed on the character display portions 203a to 203h are all enemy characters that compete with the main character and the ally character, but in the following description relating to the list effect, the characters It may be called "." In addition, the thing of the same kind as enemy characters AF in embodiment mentioned above may be used as a part of character displayed on character display part 203a-203h.

  As shown in FIG. 25B, in the character display unit 203a positioned at the left end of the list display area 201, a character with an angry expression with a round face (hereinafter referred to as "character A" or "character A") is displayed. A male character (hereinafter referred to as "character B" or "character B") which is displayed and which is not worn with glasses is displayed on the character display section 203b on the right side.

  In addition, on the character display unit 203c on the right side, a female character (hereinafter referred to as "character C" or "character C") not wearing glasses is displayed, and on the character display unit 203d on the right side , A character of angry expression with face length (hereinafter referred to as "character D" or "character D") is displayed. Furthermore, the character display portion 203e on the right side displays a smile character (hereinafter referred to as "character E" or "character E") with a face length, and the character display portion 203f on the right side displays glasses A female character (hereinafter referred to as "character F" or "character F") to which the character is multiplied is displayed.

  In addition, a character with a round face and a smile (hereinafter referred to as "character G" or "character G") is displayed on the character display portion 203g on the right side, and the character display portion 203h on the right side is glasses The male character (hereinafter referred to as "character H" or "character H") is displayed.

  Here, regarding the characters A to H in the present embodiment, the positional relationship between the character display portions 203a to 203h and the characters A to H is not constant, and the character display portions 203a to 203h are sequentially arranged from the left end to the right end in the drawing. On the other hand, different characters A to H can be arranged each time according to a predetermined rule (here, the first and second rules). For example, the character C may be displayed on the character display unit 203a or the character B may be displayed on the character display unit 203g as a result of an operation (described later) based on a predetermined rule.

  In addition to characters A to H, for example, characters I to K are provided, and eight characters out of eight characters A to K are displayed through predetermined selection processing. It is also good. Furthermore, the number of character display portions may be less than eight, or nine or more.

  Subsequently, the above-described first index display portions 202a to 202d will be described. The first index display portions 202a to 202d are configured to classify the characters A to H as described above based on a predetermined first index (here, probability change expectation degree), and to group them. That is, the characters A to H are associated with the probability change expectation (first index), and the probability change expectation is determined according to the type of the characters A to H.

  The details of the probability change expectation of the characters A to H will be described later, but the characters A to H are grouped according to the corresponding probability change expectation, and examples of FIGS. 25 (a) and 25 (b) The characters A and B are assigned to the leftmost group 1 in the figure. Also, characters C to E are assigned to group 2 shown on the right of group 1, and characters F and G are assigned to group 3 shown on the right of group 2. Then, the character H is assigned to the group 4 shown at the right end in the figure.

  Here, the “probability change expectation degree” corresponds to the ratio in which the type of the winning jackpot is the probability change big hit. And "the probability change expectation degree" is decided according to the kind of big hit, and as mentioned above, the kind of big hit is decided by the kind of special symbol concerning big hit.

  In the present embodiment, the probability change expectation is higher in the order of group 1, group 2, group 3, and group 4. Then, the degree of probability change expectation (the probability change expectation) is represented by the number of star marks in the first index display portions 202a to 202d in FIGS. 25 (a) and (b). There is.

  The least probable variation group 1 is indicated generically by a single star mark, and the next least probable variation group 2 is also indicated collectively by a double star symbol. In addition, group 3 is generically indicated by three star marks, and the most probable group 4 is indicated by four star marks. In addition, the value of the probability change expectation of each character and the calculation method will be described later.

  Subsequently, the above-described second index display portions 204a to 204h will be described. The second index display portions 204a to 204h are configured to represent predetermined second indices (here, the amount of balls ejected) associated with the respective characters A to H. The payout amount referred to here indicates an approximation of the number of winning balls that the player can obtain in accordance with the type of the winning jackpot. Furthermore, in this list effect, the amount of dispensed balls may be referred to as "reward".

  The amount of payout (reward) can be theoretically calculated by the product of the number of winning balls per winning, the number of entering one round (count), and the number of rounds determined according to the type of the big hit. When the number of winning balls per winning combination is 15, the number of entering balls per round is 10, and the type of big hit is 15 R, the amount of balls ejected is 2,250. Further, when the type of the big hit is 7R big hit, the amount of dispensed balls is 1050, and when it is 5R big hit, the amount of dispensed balls is 750.

  In the example shown in FIGS. 25 (a) and 25 (b), the amount of dispensed balls associated with the characters A and B is 2250 and 1050 respectively, and the second corresponding to the characters A and B is obtained. The numerical value of "2250" and "1050" is displayed on the index display parts 204a and 204b. Furthermore, the amount of balls corresponding to the characters C to E is 2250, 1050, and 750, respectively, and the corresponding second index display portions 204c to 204e indicate “2250” and “1050”, respectively. , "750" is displayed.

  Similarly, 2250 pieces and 1050 pieces of balls are associated with the characters F and G, respectively, and the corresponding second index display portions 204f and 204g are "2250" and "1050", respectively. The numerical value of is displayed. Then, the amount of dispensed balls associated with the character H is 2250 pieces, and the corresponding second index display unit 204 h displays a numerical value of “2250”.

  In addition, as a kind of big hit, for example, even if it is 15R big hit, the open period of the 1st big winning opening 91 (or the 2nd big winning opening 92) in the part round is short, for example 0.5-1 seconds In addition, it is possible to provide things such as 15R positive variation (real 7R) and 15R positive variation (real 5R), etc., which can only substantially get out balls (outballs) of the same extent as 7R big hit or 5R big hit. And a prize may occur even in a round having a short opening period as described above, and in such a case, the payout amount of the winning balls is performed, so the actual amount of balls to be dispensed is the second indicator display portion 204a. It may exceed the value displayed in ~ 204 h.

  Further, the combination of the character type and each index such as the probability of variation expectation and the amount of popped balls is not limited to the combination described here. Furthermore, for each index, it is possible to adopt an index other than the probability change expectation degree and the amount of payout. For example, instead of the amount of dispensed balls, the rate of hitting the largest number of rounds (here, 15 R) among the big hits (for example, can be referred to as the “maximum dispensed rate”) or the like is adopted as any index It is possible. Furthermore, it is also possible to adopt an index such as, for example, the order of strength (win rate) of allied characters, the ratio of drawing a special move, and the like.

  Then, if the ratio of drawing a special move is used as an index, for example, the maximum number of rounds and the amount of popping out when the main character or the ally character wins the enemy character by its own predetermined special move. If the player wins with a technique that is not a special move technique, it is possible to adopt presentation control such that it is only a relatively small number of rounds and a big hit for the amount of balls drawn.

  Here, the above-mentioned effect state display area 206 shown in FIG. 25A can display the state of effect at that time. In the example of FIG. 25 (a), the appearing character (character H) and the probability variation expectation (here, "96% or more") associated with the character are displayed in characters in this effect state display area 206 ing. Further, the above-mentioned big hit gaming state display area 207 can display the progress of a special game which is a big hit game. In the example of FIG. 25 (a), the number of rounds (here, the third R) and the winning situation of the winning balls (here, 450 as the current reward) are displayed in characters in the big hit gaming state display area 207. There is.

Furthermore, the above-mentioned message display area 208 shown in FIG. 25A can display a message according to the state of the effect at that time. In the example of FIG. 25A, in the message display area 208, messages indicating that the generated big hit is the “fourth big hit” are continuously displayed in a telop. Further, the above-mentioned right-handed display area 209 can display that it is a situation where right-handed driving should be performed. In the example of FIG. 25A, the character display of "right-handed" is performed.
<< Method for determining character placement (during a round battle) >>
<<< First sort pertaining to list effect during round effect >>>

  Next, a method of determining the arrangement of the characters A to H in the list effect in FIGS. 25 (a) and 25 (b) will be described. The chart of FIG. 26A shows the relationship between each of the characters A to H and the index such as the probability of change expectation and the amount of balls to be dispensed. The top row of the table in FIG. 26 (a) corresponds to the first index display portions 202a to 202d described above, and the top row indicates the character classification (groups 1 to 4) based on the probability variation expectation ing. Furthermore, in the next step (second step from the top) in FIG. 26A, the types (A to H) of the characters described above are shown.

  Further, the next row (third row from the top) in FIG. 26 (a) shows numerical values representing the probability variation expectation of each of the characters A to H, and in the next row (fourth row from the top) Indicates a numerical value representing the amount of balls ejected from each of the characters A to H. Then, the classification of the probability variation expectation, the character, and the arrangement (order) of the row direction in the amount of balls in the diagram of FIG. 26 (a) are the probability variation in the list effect shown in FIG. 25 (a), (b) The order of the expected degree, the character, and the horizontal alignment of the amount of balls are coincident. The arrangement of characters and the like in the list effect shown in FIGS. 25 (a) and 25 (b) is determined based on the arrangement of the characters and the like in FIG. 26 (a).

  Note that what is shown at the bottom of FIG. 26 (a) is an index for an embodiment different from this embodiment, and the big hit expectation of each of the characters A to H is used as an index other than the probability change expectation and the amount of popping out. It shows. An embodiment using this big hit expectation as an index will be described later.

  In this embodiment, the probability variation expectancy of characters A to H is 20%, 25%, 50%, 44%, 45%, 70%, 73 in order from the left as shown in FIG. %, 96% or more (96%). Then, for the group 1 to which the characters A and B belong (group in which there is one star mark), the probability of probability change is higher as it goes from left to right in the drawing.

  The group 1 can be comprehensively referred to, for example, as a group having a probability of change expectation of about 20% (or about 25% or the like). Hereinafter, this group 1 may be referred to as "about 20% group", "about 25% group", or "less competitive group" or the like. Furthermore, the amount of dispensed balls pertaining to the characters A and B in group 1 is 2250 and 1050 as described above, and the amount of dispensed balls decreases from the left to the right in the figure contrary to the probability change expectation. It has become.

  Subsequently, for the group 2 to which the characters C to E belong (groups with two star marks), the probability change expectation is 50%, 44%, 45% as shown from left to right in the figure, Both of them are larger than the maximum value of the probability change expectation degree related to the group 1 (here, 25% of the character b). The group 2 can be, for example, comprehensively referred to as a group of about 50%. Hereinafter, this group 2 may be referred to as a “about 50%”, a “50: 50 (fifty fifty)” group, or the like. Further, the amount of dispensed balls pertaining to the characters C to E of group 2 is 2250, 1050 and 750 as described above, and the amount of dispensed balls decreases from the left to the right in the drawing.

  Subsequently, for the group 3 to which the characters F and G belong (groups with three star marks), the probability change expectation is 70% and 73% as shown from left to right in the figure, and both are It is larger than the maximum value of the probability change expectation degree according to the group 2 (here, 50% of the characters C and E). The group 3 can be comprehensively referred to, for example, as a group having a probability change expectation value of about 70% (or about 80% or the like). Hereinafter, the group 1 may be referred to as “about 70% group”, “about 80% group”, or “predominant group”. Furthermore, the amount of popping out for the characters F and G in group 3 is 2250 and 1050 as described above, and the amount of popping out decreases from the left to the right in the figure contrary to the probability change expectation. It has become.

  Subsequently, with regard to the group 4 to which the character H belongs (group of four star marks), only one kind of character (character H) belongs. The probability change expectation for the character H of the group 4 is 96% or more, which is larger than the maximum value of the probability change expectation for the group 3 (here, 80% of the character g). The group 4 can be referred to as a group of almost definite positive determination. Hereinafter, this group 4 may be referred to as “a group of almost definite positive determination” or “a group of intense heat”. Furthermore, the amount of balls out related to the character H of group 4 is 2250 as described above.

  With regard to the group 2 described above, the magnitude relationship of the probability variation expectation degrees pertaining to the belonging characters C to E is irregular as opposed to ascending order (or descending order) from left to right in the drawing. Then, in the example of FIG. 26A, the probability change expectation for the character C located at the left end in the drawing in the group 2 is 50%, and the probability change expectation for the character D on the right side is Is also low at 44%. Furthermore, here, the probability variation expectation of the character placed on the right side of the character D is 45%, which is higher than the character D and lower than the character C.

  As described above, the magnitude relationship of the probability change expectation is different between the group 1 and the group 2 because a plurality of types of character sorting rules (sorting rules) are defined (here, the first sorting rule And second sort rule). That is, in the present embodiment, the probability change expectation is adopted as an index (first index) for the first sort rule, and the amount of balls is adopted as an index (second index) for the second sort rule. ing. Then, as data processing for determining the arrangement of the characters, the whole of the characters A to H is sorted (first sort) according to the first sort rule based on the probability variation expectation (in the present embodiment, Is not a numerical value of the probability variation expectations of the individual characters, but is sorted by the number of stars indicating the probability variation expectation, that is, in groups. The sorting (second sort) according to the above-described second sort rule will be described later.

  As for the characters A to H shown in FIG. 26A, the probability change expectation is 20%, 25%, 50%, 44%, 45%, 70%, 73%, 96% or more as described above. There is. For this reason, although the illustration is omitted, the character arrangement determined by the first sort is character A (20%), character B (25%), character D (44%), character E in descending order of probability change expectation. (45%), character C (50%), character F (70%), character G (73%), character H (96% or more).

  Then, grouping is performed based on the result of the first sort, and the two characters A and B are group 1 (one star), and the three characters C to E are group 2 (star 2), two characters F and G are classified into group 3 (three stars), and the largest one character H is classified into group 4 (four stars).

As described above, the threshold value (the threshold value related to the probability change expectation) for grouping is not limited to the assignment of the characters A to H according to the number of characters in the group, for example, after the first sort. Set characters with probability change expectation less than 0-40% classified into group 1, characters classified 40% or more and less than 60% into group 2, and characters 60% or more but less than 90% into group 3. , 90% or more of the characters can be classified into group 4 and the like.
<<< The second sort during round production >>>

  Subsequently, the above-described second sort based on the amount of payout (reward) will be described. In this second sort, characters are arranged from left to right in ascending order of the amount of balls out in each group in FIG. 26 (a). For example, for the group 1, the amount of withdrawal of the character A is 2250, and the amount of withdrawal of the character B is 1050. And also with regard to the amount of balls, since the value for the character B is large similarly to the probability change expectation, the arrangement change of the characters A and B by the second sort is not performed, and the arrangement of the characters A and B is the first It is not different from the arrangement by sorting.

  On the other hand, for the group 2, the amount of withdrawal of the character C is 2250, the amount of withdrawal of the character D is 1050, the amount of withdrawal of the character E is 750, and the amount relationship of the amount of withdrawal Is different from the magnitude relationship (44%, 45%, 50% in the order of D, E, C) of the probability change expectation. Then, the second sort is prioritized in the group, and the arrangement of the characters C to E is rearranged in the order of the character C, the character D and the character E from the left in FIG. Be

  Subsequently, the second sort is performed also for the group 3. However, as in the case of the group 1, the positional relationship between the characters F and G by the second sort is changed because the magnitude relationship between the amount of withdrawal and the probability change expectation is identical. Will not take place. Furthermore, for the group 4, since only one character belongs, no change in the character arrangement by the second sort is performed. Here, in FIG. 26A, a row in which the first index related to the first sort is indicated is represented as “sort order 1”, and a row in which the second index related to the second sort is displayed is referred to as “sort order 2”. It represents as ".

  As described above, once grouping is performed by rough arrangement of characters by the first sort, there may be a case where arrangement in the group is changed by the second sort. And the arrangement change by the second sort is not performed as a result of the first sort, depending on the arrangement determining factor such as the value (here, the amount of balls) according to the second index, the kind of character, but the result of the first sort It may be left.

  Also, the arrangement of the characters can make it easy for the player to recognize that, for example, the characters become stronger or weaker in one direction sequentially. The same is true even if the characters A to H are arranged and displayed at a stage where the first sorting is performed and the second sorting is not performed. In addition to such a point, by performing the second sort, it is possible to give changes based on other rules to a part of the whole without simply remaining in ascending order or descending order.

  In this embodiment, since the results of the first sort are grouped (groups 1 to 4), and the arrangement change based on the second sort is further performed in the group, an overall impression of the character arrangement based on the first sort In addition, the player can be urged to think that, among them, the player can win the maximum payout by winning a predetermined character. Therefore, it is possible to diversify the disposition of characters and to diversify the impression given to the player.

  Furthermore, for example, when there is a character that the player wants to particularly emphasize and show, even if the character is not displayed at a prominent position in the first sort, it may be arranged at a prominent position by the second sort Sex occurs. Therefore, even if a desired effect can not be obtained by merely performing the first sort, the second sort may possibly place the characters in a prominent position.

  Here, as the “prominent position” mentioned here, for example, the end (the left and right ends in the example of FIG. 25B), the center, etc. of the list display area 201 can be exemplified. When the number of character display parts (203a to 203h) is an even number as in the example shown in FIG. 25 (b), the part near the center can be set as the above-mentioned center part.

  In addition, before performing the second sort, it is possible to determine whether or not the magnitude relationship matches with the amount of withdrawal and the probability change expectation, and in the case where they match, it is possible not to perform the second sort. It is. Similarly, before performing the second sort, it is possible to determine whether or not only one character belongs to the group, and when there is only one character, it is possible not to perform the second sort.

Further, for example, when executing a battle effect as shown in FIG. 25A, the symbol ratio of “per 2” is set to 100% except when the battle effect is performed (when the battle effect is not performed), If battle rendition is not performed, it may be considered that only "per 2" of "per 1" and "per 2" is generated. Then, the game property in this case is such that “one hit” does not occur when the battle effect is not executed during the fluctuation effect, and this can discourage the player.
<< Operation effect of the invention by performing the first sort and the second sort >>

  According to the pachinko gaming machine which performs the list effect as described above, after sorting the characters by the first index such as the probability change expectation and the big hit expectation, the character is sorted by using the other second index. . This enables complex and complex sorting of characters. For example, as in the example of group 2 related to the probability change expectation degree and the big hit expectation degree shown in FIG. 26 (a), there may be a case where a turn of order may occur, and from this, according to the value of one index More complex and diverse sorting is possible compared to the case of arranging in ascending or descending order.

  Furthermore, it can be said that the list effect is an effect that determines the display order of the character in a plurality of steps (here, two steps). Therefore, for example, it is possible to reduce the effect mode having the possibility of transition associated with the character to a predetermined number, and then squeeze the effect mode having the possibility of transition after that in a stepwise manner.

In addition, the list effect can be used in combination with other effect functions, such as a limited frequency pattern effect or a preread effect. And also by this, as mentioned above, various effects are possible.
<<< Method of calculating probability of change expectation (win rate)>

  Next, a method of calculating the above-mentioned probability change expectation degree (win rate) will be described. The table of FIG. 26 (b) shows the distribution of probability variation and non-determinism (normal) at the time of a big hit, and the distribution of effect (probability variation effect) in the case of a probability variation. And in this embodiment, when it becomes a definite change, "character A battle" which is a battle production using characters A-H, "character B battle", ..., "character H battle" is performed In some cases, effects are performed such that the type of big hit (type of probability variation big hit) differs depending on the character that has won the battle.

  In the example of FIG. 26 (b), the chart type (here, “round effect distribution”) is described at the left end of the top row of the chart, and “selectivity (%)” and “selectivity (%)” are displayed on the right × Design ratio (%) is stated. Further on the right side is the "wining rate" which is the probability change expectation level. Under these (next stage), "no battle" as the type of effect related to the special game (big hit game), and "per defeat," "one per win," "two per win," which will be the effect with a round battle. "Per defeat (a)", "per 1 (i)", "per 2 (u)", "i + u" are described. Among these, “per defeat”, “per 1” and “per 2” correspond to the type of jackpot (see FIG. 24) described above. Also, the meaning of "per defeat (A)", "per 1 (I)", "per 2 (U)" and "I + E" will be described later.

  Furthermore, in the left end portion (front side) of FIG. 26B, items relating to the type of effect are shown. Specifically, the "basic normal round effect" and the "special normal round effect" below that indicate the round effect when the battle effect is not performed. Among these, “basic normal round effect” indicates collectively the basic effects of a series of round effects that are not battle effects. Also, "special normal round effect" indicates collectively a specific one of a series of round effects that are not battle effects. As this "special normal round effect", a round effect etc. can be exemplified in the case of sudden change (probability).

  And the numbers of "95", "0", "0" and "0" shown on the right of "basic normal round effect" indicate that the selection ratio of "basic normal round effect" is "no round battle," "defeat It shows that it is 95%, 0%, 0%, 0% about each case of "per 1", "per 1", and "per 2". In addition, the numbers “5”, “0”, “8.8” and “10” shown on the right side of the above “special special effects” indicate that the selection ratio of “special special round effects” is “no round battle” For each case of "per defeat", "per 1" and "per 2", it is 5%, 0%, 8.8% and 10%.

  Furthermore, “character A battle” to “character H battle” illustrated in FIG. 26B indicate types of battle effects. The “character A battle” indicates the battle effect of the content that the character A wins, and the “character B battle” indicates the battle effect of the content that the character B mentioned above wins. Similarly, “character C battle” to “character H battle” indicate battle effects of contents that the corresponding characters C to H win.

  As shown in FIG. 26 (b), the selection ratio of "character A battle" is 21% in the case of "per defeat", 3.7% in the case of "one per case", and "2 per case". Is 0%. In the present embodiment, as described above, the symbol ratio (round distribution) of “per defeat”, “per 1” and “per 2” is set to 35%, 50% and 15%. Therefore, the selection ratio of "character A battle" is calculated using the symbol ratio: 7.35% (= 21% x 0.35), 1.85% (= 3.7 x 0.5), It will be 0% (= 0% × 0). Hereinafter, these are referred to as “symbol selection ratios” related to each effect.

  As described above, the "loss hit" is the type of jackpot in which the character loses the battle, and "hit 1" and "hit 2" are the types of jackpot in which the character wins the battle is there. For this reason, the winning rate of the character is “A” for symbol selection ratio for “per defeat”, “A” for symbol selection ratio for “per 1” and “U” for symbol selection ratio for “per 2”. When it represents, it can obtain | require with the calculation formula of (i + ui) / (i + i + ui).

  Taking the above-mentioned "character A battle" as an example, the value of (a + e), which is the sum of symbol selection ratio of probability variation big hit, is 1.85 (= 1.85 + 0) as shown in FIG. 26 (b) It becomes. Further, the probability (wining rate) of the character A to win and becoming any of the probability variation big hits is (1.85 + 0) / (7.35 + 1.85 + 0) ≒ 0.20 = 20%. Then, the winning percentage is calculated as the probability change expectation (20%) of the character A shown in FIG. 26 (a).

  Similarly, for "Chara B Battle" in FIG. 26 (b), the selection ratio of "Chara B Battle" is 18% in the case of "per defeat", 1% in the case of "per 1", "per In the case of 2 ", it is 10.5%, and the symbol ratio of" per defeat "," per 1 "and" per 2 "is 6.3%, 0.5% and 1.575%. . Then, the total value of the symbol selection ratio for the probability variation big hit is 2.075, and the winning percentage of the character B is 2.075 / (6.3 + 0.5 + 1.575) ≒ 25%. Although the winning reward (amount of withdrawal) of the character B is shown in FIG. 25 to be “1050”, it appears as shown in the previous embodiment, such as an allied character participation battle as an effect during the big hit. Since the promotion of ball promotion and directing a special move to kill the enemy may be accompanied by effects such as the amount of withdrawal "2250", in "per 1" where the amount of withdrawal is "2250", "Chara B battle" Is supposed to be deployed. The same is true for character battles other than the other withdrawal amount “2250”, and only the character battle for the withdrawal amount “2250” is set not to be performed at “per hit 2”.

  Furthermore, also for "character C battle" to "character H battle", the symbol selection ratio is to be obtained from the selection ratio in the case of "per defeat," "one per unit" and "per unit 2" shown in FIG. Thus, the winning rates of the characters C to H are approximately 50%, 44%, 45%, 70%, 73%, and 96%. These winning rates are assumed to be probability variation expectations shown in FIG. 26 (a), and are used as indicators of sorting (first sorting) of the characters A to H.

  The determination of the character on the sub main substrate 301 is performed under the appearance rate of the character described later. Then, the determination of the characters in the sub main substrate 301 is not determined by the main variation pattern uniformly determined by the main substrate 102, but is uniquely determined by the sub main substrate 301 from among a plurality of characters to be selected. In some cases.

Therefore, the method of calculating the winning percentage as shown in FIGS. 25A and 25B and FIGS. 27A to 27C described later is the variation pattern of either the main substrate 102 or the sub main substrate 301. It does not indicate the percentage of decisions. The method of calculating the winning percentage illustrated in FIGS. 25 (a) and (b) and FIGS. 27 (a) to 27 (c) comprehensively determines the result of a series of fluctuation pattern determinations by the main substrate 102 and the sub main substrate 301. It can be said that it is conceptualized and shown.
<< Effect control mode concerning command reception during round effect >>

  Here, as an effect control mode for executing effects relating to each character during round effects, the following can be exemplified. For example, the command sent from the main to the sub during a big hit does not particularly include a command specifying an effect. Then, when the round effect is a battle effect, the main substrate 102 sends a 1R-eye big hit, middle demo 1 (command at the time of big hit, middle big winning opening opening) related to the symbol 1 or the symbol 2.

The sub main board 301 sends the sub main command to the sub sub board 302 relating to the effect for the first R (the main character and the character B facing each other, etc.) according to the stored battle effect partner information (here, character B). send. Furthermore, when the big hit middle demo 2 pertaining to the second R is sent from the main substrate 102 to the sub main substrate 301, the sub main substrate 301 produces a presentation for the second R (the main character or character B will attack It can be assumed that the sub main command corresponding to the effect to be displayed etc. is sent.
<< Big hit design pattern reading [ALL_MAX zone etc. etc]

  Next, effects other than the “character A battle” to the “character H battle” in FIG. 26B will be described. In FIG. 26B, the winning rates according to the "ALL_MAX trigger" and the "character K participation" are shown as effects other than the "character A battle" to the "character H battle". Here, a case will be described in which these “ALL_MAX trigger” and “character K participation” effects are selection targets along with “character A battle” to “character H battle” as round effects.

  In addition, "ALL_MAX trigger" and "character K participation battle" are performed not only as the round effect described here, but also in the fluctuation effect before the big hit occurrence (for example, during the reach etc.) and the fluctuation effect in the out-of-back fluctuation before the big hit. It relates to the execution of a series of pre-reading effects and fluctuation effects, and the round effects during a big hit. Specifically, on the basis of information (preceding information such as a winning symbol, a variation pattern, etc.) that triggers execution of the round effect of these "ALL_MAX trigger" and "character K participation battle", the preread effect such as "ALL_MAX zone" described later To be executed. And, when these effects are executed as a fluctuation effect, it is possible to execute as a pre-reading effect that takes into consideration the result of the pre-referencing lottery or the result of the symbol pre-drawing lottery based on the pending storage information, It can also be implemented as a limited frequency pattern effect not based on the pre-reading result of And about performing a case as these productions as change production, it explains suitably, after performing explanation concerning execution as a round production.

  Of these "ALL_MAX trigger" and "character K participation", "ALL_MAX trigger" is pre-read information and indicates that the degree of expectation of transition to effects such as "ALL_MAX zone" is relatively high.

  Here, "ALL_MAX" is called "all max". Also, the "ALL_MAX zone" can be referred to as the "ALL_MAX mode". Then, the "ALL_MAX zone" indicates to the player that the maximum payout amount (here, 2050) will be a big hit (15R big hit) regardless of which character among the characters remaining at that time wins. It is a zone (game section).

  Furthermore, characters appearing in the case where the "ALL_MAX zone" is executed (such as when the pre-reading information related to the execution of the "ALL_MAX trigger" is stored) are randomly determined by a predetermined character lottery. There is. The "ALL_MAX zone" can be determined (selected) when information indicating that "one per win" or "per defeat" has been sent from the main board 102 to the sub main board 301. It has become an effect.

Also, "ALL_MAX trigger" which can be a trigger to "ALL_MAX zone" can be determined in the case of "per defeat" and "per one". The selection ratio of "ALL_MAX trigger" is 2% in the case of "per defeat", 37% in the case of "one", and 37% in the case of "two" as shown in FIG. Is 0%. Furthermore, the symbol ratio of "per defeat", "per 1" and "per 2" is 0.7%, 18.5% and 0%, and the total value of the symbol selection ratio per probability variation is 18.5 . Then, when the “ALL_MAX trigger” is selected, the ratio of “one per unit” (here, referred to as “wining percentage”) is 96%, which is the same as the winning percentage of the character H described above.
<< Chara K participation mode >>

  Subsequently, the above-mentioned "character K participation game" will be described. This "character K participation game" is an effect in which a character K having a relatively low appearance ratio participates in the battle. In FIG. 26B, “(premium)” is attached to the name of “character K participating in the war”. And this "character K participation war" is determined only when it is in "one per win". Furthermore, when "character K participation" is determined, selection of the corresponding fluctuation pattern is also performed. In addition, the character K appearing in the "character K participation battle" is provided as a character that can not be lost.

As shown in FIG. 26 (b), the selection ratio of "character K participating in battle" is 0% in the case of "per defeat", 10% in the case of "per 1" and in the case of "per 2". It is 0%. Furthermore, the symbol ratio of "per defeat", "per 1" and "per 2" will be 0%, 5% and 0%, and the total value of the symbol selection ratio per unit of probability variation will be 5. Then, when "character K participation in a battle" is selected, the ratio of "one per unit" (here, referred to as "wining ratio") is 100%.
<Effect control mode related to fluctuation effect using list effect>
<< Method for determining character placement (during reach) >>
<<< First sort pertaining to list production during fluctuation production >>>

  Next, the case where the list effect as shown in FIG. 25B is executed during the reach or before the reach as part of the change effect as described before will be described. In the above-mentioned FIG. 26 (a), the big hit expectation is shown as a parameter | index for the sort used by this embodiment. The jackpot expectation is an index (first index) used in place of the probability change expectation of the embodiment for performing the round battle effect described above. And in this embodiment, a big hit expectation is used in combination with the amount of balls which is the above-mentioned 2nd index.

  The charts of FIGS. 27 (a) to 27 (c) show the winning percentage calculation method of each of the characters A to H when the list effect as shown in FIG. 25 (b) is performed as a part of the fluctuation effect. Here, in FIGS. 27 (a) to 27 (c), the disconnection in the acceptance lottery is indicated as "loss" in katakana.

  In the present embodiment relating to the variable effect, unlike the battle royal method of the round battle described above, the player side character is fixed as the main character, the main character and each character A to H perform battle effects, and the main character has won In this case, a big hit corresponding to the type of the opponent character occurs. For this reason, the winning rate in the battle rendition with the characters A to H can be considered as the big hit expectation of each character, and the big hit expectation of each character in FIG. 26 (a) is shown in FIG. It agrees with the winning percentage shown in (c). In addition, the calculation method of the winning rate (big hit expectation degree) is mentioned later.

  In FIG. 26 (a), the expected hit rate (winning rate) of each character A to H is 20%, 25%, 50%, 45%, 50%, 65%, 80%, 95% or more (95% to ). Here, in order not to make the explanation complicated, the magnitude relation relating to the jackpot expectation of the characters A to H matches the magnitude relation relating to the probability variation expectation described above, but the magnitude relation between both is the same. Is not essential.

  Also in the present embodiment, the second sort is performed on the characters A to H after the first sort, but the first sort is based on the jackpot expectation. Therefore, although the illustration is omitted, the character arrangement by the first sort is character A (20%), character B (25%), character D (45%), characters C and E (in the ascending order of big hit expectation). 50%), character F (65%), character G (80%), character H (95% or more).

  Then, grouping is performed based on the result of the first sort, and the two characters A and B are group 1 (one star), and the three characters C to E are group 2 (star 2), two characters F and G are classified into group 3 (three stars), and the largest one character H is classified into group 4 (four stars).

  If the jackpot expectation of the characters C and E completely matches including the decimal part, it is possible to treat the characters C and E as the same rank. If the jackpot expectation of the characters C and E is different below the decimal point, it is possible to determine the order of the first sort taking into consideration the difference after the decimal point.

Also, as in the embodiment using the probability change expectation as an index, for example, a threshold for grouping after the first sort (a threshold related to the big hit expectation) is set, and the big hit expectation is 0 to less than 40%. Classify characters into group 1, classify characters from 40% to less than 60% into group 2, classify characters from 60% to less than 90% into group 3, and classify characters of 90% or more into group 4 Etc. are also possible.
<<< Second sort pertaining to list production during fluctuation production >>>

Subsequently, as in the case of the probability change expectation degree, a second sort based on the amount of balls is performed. Here, the value (and the magnitude relationship) of the amount of withdrawal of the characters A to H is the same value as when sorting is performed based on the probability change expectation. Then, although the order of the characters A, B, F to H is the same as in the case of the first sort by the second sort, the order of the characters C to E is different from the order by the first sort. That is, in the case of the first sort, the characters D (45%) and the characters C and E (50%) become in descending order of the jackpot expectation, but by performing the second sort, as shown in FIG. The characters C, D, and E are arranged in the descending order of the amount of dispensed balls.
<<< Calculation method of big hit expectation degree (win rate) >>

  Next, based on FIGS. 27 (a) to 27 (c), a method of calculating the winning percentage (big hit expectation) will be described. First, FIG. 27A shows a method of calculating the winning percentage related to each of the characters A to H when the list effect as shown in FIG. 25B is executed as the reach effect. The “outside normal fluctuation” shown at the left end (front side) in the figure comprehensively means a rendering pattern (a rendering pattern of non-reach) which does not become a reach. The “other reach” at the next stage comprehensively means the reach other than the character A reach to the character H reach described later among the reach effects.

  Subsequently, the “character A reach” shown in FIG. 27A is an effect for performing the list effect as shown in FIG. 25B and means a reach effect in which the character A remains in the final. This "character A reach" may be a big hit after that or a big hit without being a big hit. Further, the numerical value of "0.8" shown on the right side of "Chara A reach" indicates the selection ratio (%) of "Chara A reach" when the result of the acceptance is out. Note that, in FIG. 27A, the selection ratio of each effect is described as “1 variation distribution”.

  Furthermore, “Chara A reach” in the case where “10” shown on the right is the result of the acceptance lottery is a big hit, and the type of the big hit is “one” where the amount of balls is the largest as described above. Indicates the selection rate (%) of In addition, “0” shown on the right is the selection of “Chara A reach” in the case where the result of the lottery is a big hit and the type of big hit is “2 per hit” where the amount of withdrawal is not the largest. It shows the percentage (%).

  That is, in the example of FIG. 27A, when the player hits "2", "Chara A reach" is not selected. And on the stage, if it develops into "Chara A reach", it will always be "one per hit" when it is a big hit, and it may be disjoint if it does not become a "one per hit".

  Furthermore, the numerical values “0.784”, “0.2”, and “0” shown on the right side thereof indicate “appearing frequency during mode”. The “mode appearance frequency” indicates, for example, the proportions in which the game result is “off”, “per 1”, or “per 2” in the mode of “character A reach”. Here, in order to simplify the explanation, the jackpot probability is simplified to 1/50 (the probability of falling off is 49/50), so the ratio of “off” is 0.784 × (49 / 50). Furthermore, the ratio of “per 1” is obtained by an arithmetic expression of 0.2 × (1/50), and the ratio of “per 2” is obtained by an arithmetic expression of 0 × (1/50). It is done.

  However, to be precise, it is necessary to carry out the calculation including the symbol ratio relating to the type of the big hit as shown in FIG. That is, the symbol ratio is 50% for the 15R probability variation of “per 1”, 10R probability variation for “per 2”, 7R probability variation, and 5R probability variation, respectively. For this reason, it is possible to perform more accurate calculation by multiplying 0.5 for "one" and 0.15 for "two". However, here, the calculation method in consideration of the symbol ratio is omitted so that the description and illustration will not be complicated.

  And when it develops into "character A reach", the ratio that the result of the game is out is 0.784 (approximately 78%), and the ratio of "one" is 0.2 (20%) It has become. And, the rate at which the result of the game is "per 2" is 0 (0%).

  Furthermore, regarding "character A reach", the numerical value of "0.2" shown on the right side thereof is the sum of "per 1" and "per 2" in the "appearing frequency during mode". And the numerical value of "wining ratio (selection ratio of the effect that the leading character wins)" shown on the right side is the "total" numerical value in "appearing frequency during mode", "off", "one per unit", and It is obtained by dividing by the total of "2 per unit". Specifically, the percentage of the numerical value obtained by the calculation of 0.2 / (0.784 + 0.2 + 0) is shown as the value (20%) of the “wining percentage”. The value of “20%” corresponds to the jackpot expectation (20%) of the character A shown in FIG. 26 (a).

  Subsequently, the next-stage "character B reach" will be described. For this "Chara B reach", "1 fluctuation distribution" related to "Detach", "Per 1" and "Per 2" becomes "0.6", "2" and "8" respectively There is. The "mode appearance frequency" associated with "off", "per 1" and "per 2" is "0.588", "0.04" and "0.16", and the character B's The "wining rate" is 25%. This “25%” value also corresponds to the jackpot expectation (25%) of the character B in FIG. 26 (a).

  Similarly, the “wining percentage” of the corresponding characters C to H is calculated based on the value of “1 variation distribution” for “character C reach” to “character H reach” shown in the subsequent steps. Then, in the example of FIG. 27 (a), the winning percentage of the characters C to H is 50%, 45%, 50%, 67%, 80%, and 95%, and each character in FIG. It is consistent with the jackpot expectation.

  In addition, it is possible to use the fluctuation presentation accompanied by such a list production, for example, in the reach production with a high hit probability (of high expectation) relatively among the reach effects. Moreover, it is also possible to utilize as a former stage presentation to reach with high possibility of developing into reach presentation with a high expectation degree before reaching as well as execution as reach presentation.

  Further, the fluctuation effect accompanied by the list effect is different from the fluctuation pattern (here, the main fluctuation pattern and the sub fluctuation pattern) of the extremely short fluctuation time (for example, about 0.6 seconds) as in the embodiment described above. It is desirable to actively show the player the taste. For this reason, it is desirable to provide as a fluctuation pattern having a sufficient effect display time such as at least 1 second to 3 seconds or more.

  By doing this, it is possible to keep the number of games (the number of wins and draws etc.) at an appropriate frequency depending on the fluctuation time. Then, when it is desired to store the amount of dispensed balls per predetermined time within a predetermined degree, it is possible to prevent the amount of dispensed balls per predetermined time from becoming excessive, and it is possible to secure a proper game. As the amount of withdrawal per predetermined time, there are so-called "short-term withdrawal", "mid-term withdrawal", "long-term withdrawal" and the like, and according to the above embodiment, the amount of withdrawal is about 1 hour It is particularly effective in relation to collateralizing such “short-term pay-offs”.

In addition, it is also possible to perform, for example, effects during a specific game in combination with a variation pattern of about 0.6 seconds which is extremely short as in the embodiment described above. Specifically, for example, in the game from 1 to 100 times (number of times of fluctuation) during time saving, the fluctuation pattern is determined from among those requiring time of at least 1 second to 3 seconds, and after exceeding 100 times During the specific game (or after the specific game), it is conceivable to determine the fluctuation pattern from those of about 0.6 seconds. Also in this way, it is possible to effectively secure performance relating to the amount of dispensed balls per predetermined time (in particular, short-term dispensed balls).
<< Character appearance rate >>

  Next, the appearance rate of characters in the case of causing a plurality of characters to appear will be described. When performing an effect that appears among a plurality of characters, as described below, the selection rate of the main variation pattern in the main substrate 102 is multiplied by the selection rate of the sub variation pattern in the sub main substrate 301. By this, it is possible to calculate the rate (appearance rate) at which the character appears. In addition, below, in order to simplify description, the kind of character which may appear finally shall be five types of AD. Also, simplified numerical values are used for the selection ratio of the main variation pattern and the selection ratio of each character.

  For example, on the main board 102, main variation pattern 1 of "character A battle" concerning character A, main variation pattern 2 of "character B battle" concerning character B, main variation concerning "character C battle" concerning character C A case is considered in which one of the main variation patterns is selected from the three types of pattern 3. The selection ratio of the main variation pattern 1 in the main substrate 102 is 5, the selection ratio of the main variation pattern 2 is 3, and the selection ratio of the main variation pattern 3 is 2. That is, it is assumed that the selection ratio of the main fluctuation patterns 1 to 3 is 5: 3: 2.

  Subsequently, when the sub main substrate 301 receives a command related to the main variation patterns 1 to 3, there is a case where one of a plurality of types of characters is uniquely selected from one type of main variation pattern. I assume. For example, when the main variation pattern 1 is received by the sub main substrate 301, the effect relating to the character A can be selected at a rate of 80%, and the effect relating to the character B can be selected at a rate of 20%.

  Furthermore, when the main variation pattern 2 is received by the sub main substrate 301, the effect relating to the character B can be selected at a rate of 80%, and the effect relating to the character C can be selected at a rate of 20%. Further, when the main variation pattern 3 is received by the sub main board 301, it is possible to select the effect relating to the character C and the effect relating to the character D at a ratio of 50%.

  That is, in the sub main substrate 301, there are relatively many cases where the determination of the sub variation pattern is performed in a one-to-many (one-to-multiple) relationship in which a plurality of sub variation patterns can be selected for one main variation pattern It is supposed to be. The selection ratio of the main variation pattern 1 on the main substrate 102 is “5”, and the selection ratio of the effect relating to the character A in the sub main substrate 301 (the appearance ratio of the character A) is “5”. Since the selection ratio of the character A is 80%, it becomes 4 (= 5 × 80%).

  Further, the ratio (the appearance ratio of the character B) for selecting the effect relating to the character B in the sub main substrate 301 is the sum of the ratio based on the main fluctuation pattern 1 and the selection ratio based on the main fluctuation pattern 2. That is, since the selection ratio of main variation pattern 1 on main substrate 102 is "5" and the selection ratio of character B based on main variation pattern 1 on sub main substrate 301 is 20%, the main variation pattern is The selection ratio of character B based on 1 is 1 (= 5 × 20%).

  Furthermore, since the selection ratio of main variation pattern 2 on main substrate 102 is “3” and the selection ratio of character B based on main variation pattern 2 on sub main substrate 301 is 80%, the main variation pattern is The selection ratio of character B based on 2 is 2.4 (= 3 × 80%). And the total value of these becomes 3.4 (= 1 + 2.4).

  Further, the ratio (the appearance ratio of character C) for selecting the effect relating to the character C in the sub main substrate 301 is the sum of the ratio based on the main fluctuation pattern 2 and the selection ratio based on the main fluctuation pattern 3. That is, since the selection ratio of main variation pattern 2 on main substrate 102 is “3” and the selection ratio of character C based on main variation pattern 2 on sub main substrate 301 is 20%, the main variation pattern is The selection ratio of the character C based on 2 is 0.6 (= 3 × 20%).

  Furthermore, since the selection ratio of main variation pattern 3 on main substrate 102 is “2” and the selection ratio of character C based on main variation pattern 3 on sub main substrate 301 is 50%, the main variation pattern is The selection ratio of the character C based on 3 is 1 (= 2 × 50%). And the total value of these becomes 1.6 (= 0.6 +1).

  Further, the ratio of selecting the effect relating to character D in sub main substrate 301 (the appearance ratio of character D) is that the selection ratio of main variation pattern 3 in main substrate 102 is “2”, and the ratio in sub main substrate 301 is Since the selection ratio of the character D is 50%, it becomes 1 (= 2 × 5%).

Thus, the appearance rate of the characters A to D can be determined, and the appearance rate of the characters A to D becomes characters A: B: C: D = 4: 3.4: 1.6: 1. Even when the types of main variation patterns and the types of characters that can be selected by sub main substrate 301 increase, the appearance rate of each character is determined by performing the same calculation for each main variation pattern and character. It is possible.
<< Retirement production >>

  Next, the charts of FIGS. 27 (b) and 27 (c) will be described. FIGS. 27 (b) and 27 (c) show an example of calculation of the winning percentage of each character when the list effect is performed as the limited frequency pattern effect. That is, FIG. 27A shows the case where “character A reach” to “character H reach” are executed as effect patterns different from those of the limited frequency pattern effect, while FIG. 27 (b) and 27 (c) show cases where "character A reach" to "character H reach" are executed as limited frequency pattern effects used only in a specific case.

  Among these, FIG. 27B shows a list effect (here, referred to as “retirement effect”) in a situation where some predetermined characters (here, character B and character E) have not appeared (retired) as opponents. ) Is the case. As a utilization form of such a retirement effect, for example, a character representing a situation in which the character B and the character E have already lost and can not participate in the battle can be exemplified. In this case, for example, the character display portions 203b and 203e pertaining to the characters B and E that do not appear are displayed with a cross (x) mark, and are displayed darker than the character display portions pertaining to the surviving characters. It is possible to indicate that the corresponding character does not appear as an opponent.

  As shown in FIG. 27 (b), “1 fluctuation distribution” related to “Chara B reach” and “Chara E reach” is “0” for “off”, “per 1”, and “per 2”. "Chara B reach" and "Chara E reach" are not selected. Here, in FIG. 27B, “-” (hyphen) is described in the “wining percentage” column, and it is shown that the character B and the character E do not appear.

  Also, by providing a non-appearing character, the value of “1 variation distribution” relating to the non-appearing character becomes “0”, so it is necessary to adjust the overall numerical balance by changing the values relating to other characters. Will occur. In the example of FIG. 27 (a), each value of “off”, “per 1” and “per 2” related to the character D and the character G is increased by comparing with the case of the normal frequency in FIG. 27 (a). I am trying to make adjustments. Further, in the example of FIG. 27A, the value of “per 1” for the character H is also changed. In addition, we have also changed the numerical values for "outside normal fluctuation" and "other reach" that do not perform list effects.

  In addition, about such a retirement presentation, it can be set as follows. For example, instead of retiring when the character loses, it may be excluded from the start of the list effect. Further, when the limited frequency period is over, for example, effects such as reviving any character may be selected on the sub main substrate 301 so as to align the effects.

Further, the retiring effect can be performed not only as the limited frequency pattern effect but also as the pre-reading effect or as the variable effect accompanying the advance notice lottery in the simple mode. And when performing as pre-reading effect, it retires according to whether it hits either “per 1” or “per 2”, whether it is a limited frequency period, there is no retiring by advance notice, etc. It is conceivable to determine the character. When all the characters or a predetermined number or more (for example, the number of persons in the list -1) retires by the notice effect or the like, one of the characters may be revived.
<< Moeality decrease production >>

  Next, in FIG. 27C, although the defeat (retirement) is not reached as in the example of FIG. 27B, whether the battle morale of a predetermined character (here, B and E) is lowered In the case of performing a list effect of a situation such as (in this case, referred to as “moment reduction effect”). Also in this case, for example, as in the case of the retirement effect, the target characters B and E are displayed with the mark “x” (cross mark) or displayed dark, and the fighting spirit is lowered. It is possible to indicate that the situation is

  As shown in FIG. 27 (c), “1 variation distribution” related to “Chara B reach” is “0.05” for “off”, “4” for “1 per”, “2 per” 16 and is changed to “0.6”, “2”, and “8” in the case of the normal frequency in FIG. 27 (a). Furthermore, the numerical value in the case of "per 1" and "per 2" is increasing while the numerical value in the case of "falling out" is decreasing, and the ratio selected in the case of pering is increasing.

  In addition, “1 fluctuation distribution” related to “Chara E reach” is “0.1” for “off”, “6” for “1”, “34” for “2”, This has been changed for "0.4", "3", and "17" in the case of the normal frequency of 27 (a). Furthermore, the numerical value in the case of "per 1" or "per 2" is decreasing while the numerical value in the case of "perception" is increasing, and the ratio to be selected in the case of outliers is increasing. And, the “wining rate” of “Chara B reach” and “Chara E reach” is increased to 89% from 25% and 50% of the normal frequency.

By performing such a morale reduction effect, it is possible to smoothly revive the character in the effect. Note that the morale reduction effect can also be referred to as, for example, a "competitive spirit reduction effect" or the like. In addition, in the case of the morale reduction effect, for example, it is conceivable to perform character display of “I seem to be weak” on the effect display device 60 or the like.
<<"ALL_MAXzone" and "character K participation war" in fluctuation production >>

  Next, the case where the above-mentioned "ALL_MAX zone" and "character K participation" are executed during the variable performance will be described. As described above, the "ALL_MAX zone" and the "character K participation battle" can be executed even during the variable presentation (such as before and during the reach). Furthermore, these effects can be executed as pre-reading effects based on the pending storage information or as limited frequency pattern effects not based on the result of the success or failure lottery.

  In addition, when these “ALL_MAX zone” and “character K participation” are executed as a fluctuation effect, the correlation with the big hit such as becoming a big hit at a rate of 100% or a rate of almost 100%, etc. Can be considered to be relatively strong. Furthermore, these "ALL_MAX zone" and "character K participation game" can be said to be suitable for use in applications that enhance the correlation with the big hit when used as a fluctuation effect. And the effect which strengthened the correlation with the big hit can be performed as a pre-reading effect based on the reservation memory information concerning the result of the success or failure lottery.

  Furthermore, when these "ALL_MAX zone" and "character K participation battle" are pre-read effects, the execution ratio in the case of the result of the acceptance lottery is lost significantly reduced, in the case of the loss is hardly performed It can be considered that (it is executed only in the case of almost a big hit).

  On the other hand, when these "ALL_MAX zone" and "character K participation" are limited frequency pattern rendition performed in a mode that does not refer to the result of the lottery, "ALL_MAX zone" and "character K participation" hit 15R big hit Since the effect is rich, only when the hit / off lottery is a hit and a 15R big hit symbol, it will develop into a character (battle) reach, and the rate of development into a battle reach becomes relatively lower than that in the normal state. If these effects are limited frequency pattern effects, the probability of shifting to the character (battle) reach effect is made relatively low if the result of the success or failure lottery is a loss (in the case of a loss, it is rare) Not be able to move to

  FIG. 28A shows an example of effect display when the player enters the ALL_MAX zone during a specific game. In the example of FIG. 28 (a), the character display of "ALL_MAX_ZONE" is performed in the effect state display area 206, and the display of the amount of balls relating to all characters in the list display area 201 (display of the second index display portion ) Has been changed to be 2050 each. Here, FIG. 28 (b) illustrates the aspect during the change effect, but the aspect of the list effect as illustrated can be applied and used also during the round effect.

  Moreover, it is possible to further consider the following as specific modes of the effect such as the "ALL_MAX zone". For example, as a part of the effect of “protagonist awakening”, a plurality of movable effect members are operated to be combined (action of character completion). Further, as the contents of the effect display, an attack of a predetermined character (protagonist character or ally character) hits an enemy character (attack hit). Then, the enemy character falls down, an effect requiring a predetermined time is executed, and the battle is won. Here, the time (directive measure) of the effect of the content that the enemy character falls down and the victory is decided is the time common to the plurality of enemy characters, and one of the effects is selected from the effects requiring the common time Ru. On the other hand, in the case of defeating the battle, it is possible to exemplify that the attack does not hit the enemy character (does not hit) and the enemy character can flee. Here, the effect mode described is not one that can not be applied to battle effect, but it is considered to be preferable to perform during the fluctuation effect.

  In addition, it can be considered that the effect of the "ALL_MAX zone" is maximized by being executed only when hitting the big hit symbol of the type corresponding to the maximum amount of dispensed balls. . For this reason, it is desirable not to execute the "ALL_MAX zone" during variation effects as the limited frequency pattern effect but to execute it as the pre-reading effect (when performing with the limited frequency effect, hits other than 15R are other than character battle reach Because it is necessary to inform with (, because production balance changes)). In addition, the effect of the "ALL_MAX zone" in the change effect requires a certain amount of effect time, and it is difficult to combine it into a very short change pattern such as 0.6. Therefore, it is desirable that selection be made only when a variation pattern (main variation pattern) of a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) or more is selected on the main substrate 102.

FIG. 28 (b) shows an example of effect display in the case of entering into "character K entry battle" during the specific game. In the example of FIG. 28 (b), the character display of “character K participating in the war victory rate 777%” is performed in the effect status display area 206, and the list display area 201 is displayed in a mode in which all the characters are retired. ing. Furthermore, in the message display area 208, messages of "done" are displayed continuously. Here, FIG. 28 (b) illustrates the aspect during the change effect, but the aspect of the list effect as illustrated can be applied and used also during the round effect.
<Further diversification of list production>

  The list effects described above (including retirement effects and morale reduction effects) can be as follows. For example, with regard to battle rendition, it is possible to execute rendition display in which characters of a normal size or mini characters battle each other during fluctuation (during fluctuation rendition). The “mini-characters” referred to here are, for example, characters drawn with two heads of characters A to H and the like. Also, the battle effect can be a battle such as a main character pair (vs) enemy character, an ally character vs. enemy character, or enemy characters. The result of change production such as battle production in a situation where reach has not been developed is reflected on the list as a morale drop production or a retirement production.

  Furthermore, the battle rendition may be started and ended during one fluctuation (during one fluctuation) (which falls within the fluctuation time related to one fluctuation) or plural fluctuations (plural fluctuations) From the start to the end may be executed (one that requires more than one change without being included in the change time related to one change). Also, in the battle effect, if a predetermined character (for example, main character) appears, it is also possible that the main character never loses or hardly loses.

  Moreover, about the above-mentioned retirement production, it performs a predetermined time (for example, 1st fluctuation) among a plurality of fluctuation productions in which a limited frequency pattern production is performed using a pattern table (retirement production table) for retirement production. It is possible to determine the effect for notifying the character to retire. In this case, the main variation pattern can be determined using the limited frequency pattern table on the main substrate 102, and the sub variation pattern can be determined on the sub main substrate 301 using the retire effect table. is there.

  In addition, for example, it is possible to adopt an effect control mode in which a mini character (or a character in a normal form) battles and the display contents of the values of the first index and the second index are changed according to the result of the defeat. It is. Then, depending on the result of the battle, it is conceivable to increase or decrease the number of stars indicating the probability change expectation (or the hit expectation) or the numerical value of the amount of popped out balls.

  For example, when the retiring effect is performed as the limited frequency pattern effect as described above, in a situation where the character with a predetermined amount of withdrawal is retiring, a jackpot corresponding to the amount of withdrawal of the character being retired is hit. It is possible that it will happen. In order to prevent such inconsistencies between the situation of the character and the lottery result, it is possible to enable the revival of the retired character to revive the character in accordance with the winning result.

  In addition, the director does not treat it as a retirement, but directs morale or injury, and he tries to match the amount of balls drawn out (or the jackpot expectation etc.) with the winning result by recovering morale or injury. It is also conceivable. In addition, reduce numerical values such as the amount of balls due to morale decline or injury, and restore numerical values such as the amount of balls based on recovery of morale or injury, or make them increase from the initial value (default value). Is also possible. In addition, it is possible to perform correspondence so that the amount of popping out decreases for a character with a high expectation of big hit, and to make the degree of expecting of big hit low for a character with a large amount of popping, but morale or injury It is possible to increase the jackpot expectation (wining rate) or to decrease the amount of balls out when there is a recovery of

  It should be noted that on the side of the sub main substrate 301, processing such as limiting or changing the type of contact transmitted from the main substrate 102 to a specific one can not be performed. For this reason, while the main substrate 102 hits the jackpot equivalent to 750 balls, the sub main substrate 301 has a sub variation pattern that beats the character associated with 2250 balls. It is necessary to make sure that there is no inconsistency (齟齬) between the contents of presentation and the amount of balls (reward) such that is selected. Then, as a countermeasure for such a case, in the sub main substrate 301, an effect of changing the relationship between the kind of character and the amount of popped ball (the main lord) is executed, and the amount of popped ball is changed to 750. It can be considered to be consistent.

  Furthermore, when the ally characters battle, it is also possible to execute the list effect as a preread effect. For example, as a pre-reading effect, when an ally character defeats an enemy character, the amount of withdrawal of the enemy character killed at that time is accumulated (stocked). Then, when a fluctuation effect (a fluctuation effect of the trigger fluctuation) corresponding to the trigger suspension relating to the pre-reading is performed, the stocked ball amount that has been stocked is added to (added to) the balled amount of the enemy character at that time. Is possible.

  More specifically, for example, a character with 750 balls is defeated at the time of pre-reading effect, and it is developed into a battle effect with a character with 1050 characters at the time of the next fluctuation effect, and 1800 pieces (750 The effect can be exemplified as performing an effect as the amount of payout of +1050 pieces.

  However, for example, in the case where, for example, the character with a popping amount of 750 beats as a pre-reading effect and 2250 characters appear due to trigger fluctuation, etc., the total ball out amount (here, 3000) is one big hit. It is also conceivable that the value exceeds the maximum amount of balls drawn (in this case, 2250 pieces). In such a case, for example, it is conceivable to stop the display of the amount of dispensed balls after the addition to 2250 pieces, and perform an effect using the maximum amount of dispensed balls (here, 750).

  More specifically, the effect is given to inform the player that there is an excess difference, and the difference is given an expectation that leads to an increase (up) in the numerical value of the indicator such as the big hit expectation degree or the probability change expectation degree. It is possible to make it progress. In this case, it is possible not only to necessarily increase the index but also to produce a so-called (Gasse) effect that does not come up. Furthermore, as an effect that shows an expectation leading to an increase in the index, it is possible to illustrate the progress of a battle or a mission, and to increase the index when there is a battle victory or a successful mission. In addition, it can be considered that the index is more likely to be raised as the amount of difference is larger.

In addition, it is considered that the time required for the presentation is likely to be longer by making the scene of the battle accompany. For this reason, a notice is given by displaying a line (line notice) and, for example, if a line of "character B seems to have been killed" is displayed, the character B is retired or "character B is motivated" It is possible to lower the morale of the character B when the words of the words "Let's seem to be missing" are displayed. By doing this, it is possible to change the situation of the character in a short time. Then, for changing the situation of the character, for example, when the number of reservations is more than a predetermined number (for example, two), the battle effect is executed, and when the number of reservations is small, the line announcement is performed. It is possible.
<< Effect control mode that relates the retiring effect and the morale lowering effect and the number of times of time reduction >>

  Although FIG. 22 (b-3) described above shows an example in which the variation pattern table is changed according to the type of symbol, it is conceivable to change the variation pattern table also for the retiring effect or the morale lowering effect. I see. FIG. 29A is a chart showing the transition of the limited frequency pattern effect according to the retiring effect or the morale lowering effect. In FIG. 29 (a), the symbol D indicates the time variation pattern table considered to be normal, as in the case of the above-described example.

  Furthermore, symbol E in FIG. 29A indicates a variation pattern table related to retirement effects, and symbol F indicates a variation pattern table related to morale reduction effects. A plurality of types of fluctuation pattern tables relating to retirement effects and fluctuation pattern tables relating to morale reduction effects are provided. The symbol E '(e-dash) in the figure indicates a variation pattern table related to another type of retirement effect, and the symbol F' (e-dash) indicates a variation pattern related to another type of morale reduction presentation It shows a table.

  In the example shown in FIG. 29 (a), four types of 15R positive variables 1 to 4 are shown as symbols related to 15R positive variables, and on the right side, a variation pattern used according to the number of symbol variations during time saving A table is shown.

  For example, in the case of winning the symbol of 15R definite variation 1, the variation pattern table D is used while the number of variations is 1 to 30 in the time saving game after the special game is over. Furthermore, the fluctuation pattern table E according to retirement effect is used while the number of fluctuations during time saving is 31 to 60, and the fluctuation pattern table to be used is returned to D for 61 to 90 times. Then, while the number of fluctuations during time saving is 91 to 120, E ', which is another fluctuation pattern table related to retiring effect, is used. Such transition of the fluctuation pattern table can be said to be transitioning to non-retirement presentation after transitioning to another retirement presentation after transitioning to a non-retirement presentation.

  In addition, when the symbol of 15R definite variation 2 is hit, as in the case of hitting the pattern of 15R positive variation 1 between 1 to 30 times and 31 to 60 times, the number of fluctuations in time is 1 to 30 times, Fluctuation pattern tables D and E are used. Furthermore, while the number of changes during time saving is 61 to 90, the change pattern table F pertaining to morale lowering effects is used, and while the number of changes is 91 to 120, the change pattern table E pertaining to retirement effects is E. 'Is used. It can be said that such transition of the fluctuation pattern table is to shift to another retirement effect after the effect of lowering the morale after the effect of retiring.

  Similarly, when the symbol of 15R positive variation 3 is hit, the variation pattern table is used in the order of D, F, F 'and E'. It can be said that such transition of the fluctuation pattern table is to shift from a morale-down effect to another morale-down effect to continue the morale-down effect, and thereafter to transition to a retirement effect.

  Furthermore, when the symbol of 15R definite variation 4 is hit, the variation pattern table is used in the order of D, F ′, E, F. It can be said that such transition of the fluctuation pattern table shifts from the morale lowering effect to the retiring effect and shifts to another morale lowering effect.

  In the example shown in FIG. 29A, the variation pattern table is changed every 30 games (30 times), but it is not limited to this, for example, every 20 times or every 40 times, etc. You may make changes. In addition, the variation pattern table is switched at a different number of times, such as the variation pattern table D in the 1st to 20th times and the variation pattern table D in the 21st to 60th times. May be By doing this, it becomes difficult for the player to distinguish whether the change of the fluctuation pattern table is due to the table transition decided in advance or the pre-reading, and it is possible to diversify the effects. .

  Further, in the example of FIG. 29A, the maximum number of time is set to 120 times, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, there may be less than 100 times or more than 120 times. May be The symbol 2 may be every 20 times, and the symbol 3 may be every 15 times or the like.

Furthermore, as effect contents at the transition timing of each table, such effects as continuity of display content are executed across the transition timing (taking over of the effect contents), techniques such as scene change, etc. It may be considered that the continuity is not maintained by (the fact that the contents of the presentation are not handed over). Further, the transition of the fluctuation pattern table is not limited to that illustrated in FIG. 29A, and various ones can be adopted.
<< Effect control mode that associates list effects and button effects >>

  Furthermore, the list effect as described above can be associated with a button effect using the operation button 22 described above. For example, when the list effect is started, when the player continuously hits the operation button 22, the enemy characters are sequentially erased and retired, and then the enemy character becomes one and the battle effect proceeds, or the enemy It can be exemplified that there are no characters and there is a definite change (or a big hit).

  When sequentially erasing the enemy characters, for example, it is possible to consider such an effect that the enemy characters are erased one by one each time the operation button 22 is pressed a predetermined number of times (five times etc.). In addition, in the case where it does not become a definite change or a big hit, it is possible to think of an effect that even if the operation button 22 is continuously hit, the enemy character is not deleted more than that. Further, it is also possible to think that when the operation button 22 is continuously hit and a definite change or a big hit is determined, a predetermined plurality of movable effect members are displaced so as to be combined.

The number of times of operations required to delete one enemy character is not limited to a predetermined number of times in succession, for example, depending on the type of enemy character or depending on the situation. Further, a plurality of (including all) text characters may be erased by one button operation. And also in this case, a plurality of movable effect members may be combined.
<< Other display modes of list effect >>

  The display mode of the list effect is not limited to the horizontal single-row mode as shown in FIG. 25 (b), and various display modes can be used. For example, as shown in FIG. 29 (b), it is conceivable to arrange the display columns of groups 1 to 4 vertically and horizontally.

  In the list effect shown in FIG. 29B, the inside of the square frame is equally divided into four, and the first index display portions 202a to 202d are provided above the respective divided regions. Furthermore, two types of character display portions 203a to 203h are assigned to each of the first index display portions 202a to 202d, and each of the groups 1 to 4 is configured by two types of characters. Furthermore, one second index display unit 204a to 204h is associated with each of the character display units 203a to 203h. The character display portions 203a to 203h on which the characters A to H are displayed are arranged in a ring.

  Here, in the list effect of the present embodiment, characters are equally allocated to the groups 1 to 4 so that the description is not complicated, but groups having different numbers of characters may be provided. Further, in FIG. 29 (b), the reference numerals of the second index display portions relating to the characters B and C are omitted.

  For each of the characters A to H, a value serving as a first index such as a probability change expectation or a big hit expectation is defined, but the value relating to the first index is, for example, as shown in FIGS. It can be made similar to the previous embodiment shown in FIG. 26 (a). Also in this embodiment, the second sort is performed after the first sort and the arrangement (order) of the characters A to H is the same as the example shown in FIGS. 25 (a), (b) and 26 (a). It has been decided.

  For example, it is possible to display the list shown in FIG. 29 (b) on the effect display device 60 and perform the list effect during the reach in the change effect. Such a list effect can be executed as a preread effect or as a limited frequency pattern effect. Further, it can be used for any of the "ALL_MAX zone", the "character K participation", the retirement effect, and the morale reduction effect described above.

  The present invention is not limited to the above-described various embodiments, and various modifications can be made. For example, in the list effect described so far, the individual characters are displayed to indicate the development destination, the amount of balls, etc., but the present invention is not limited thereto. It is also possible to display a list of possible jackpot types by displaying characters as in “XX mode” and “XX jackpot”. Furthermore, the present invention is applicable not only to pachinko gaming machines, but also to effect display relating to, for example, a roll-to-roll gaming machine (slot machine).

10 pachinko game machine, 50 game board, 52 game areas, 53 main control display devices,
62 1st start winning opening, 63 2nd starting winning opening, 70 1st special symbol display section,
71 2nd special symbol display area, 91 1st big winning opening, 92 2nd big winning opening,
102 main board, 104 sub board, 301 sub main board,
302 sub sub board.

Claims (1)

Main control means for controlling the progress of the game;
Effect control means for receiving effect control information from the main control means and performing control processing according to the effect control information;
Image display means for displaying an image according to the effect determined by the effect control means;
The main control means
A predetermined random number is acquired based on the fact that game media fired to the game area flow down the game area and pass a predetermined start area,
In the random number, at least a big hit random number for a big hit lottery determination, a special symbol random number for determination of a special symbol indicating the result of the big hit lottery determination, and a variation for determination of a variation pattern related to the special symbol Including pattern random numbers,
Perform a big hit lottery determination to determine whether or not a big hit based on the big hit random number,
Perform special symbol lottery determination to determine the special symbol based on the special symbol random number,
Performing a fluctuation pattern lottery determination to determine the fluctuation pattern based on the fluctuation pattern random number;
Based on the results of the big hit lottery determination, the special symbol lottery determination, and the variation pattern lottery determination, the special symbol is variably displayed on the main control display means and then stopped and the result of the big hit lottery determination is a big hit In the case of a special game, a special game is performed to open a predetermined opening / closing area a predetermined number of times after the stop display of the special symbol.
Based on the result of the special symbol lottery determination, it is possible to set a specific game that is advantageous to the player after the end of the special game,
Even if the game medium passes through the start area, when the start condition of the variable display of the special symbol is not satisfied, it is possible to store the special symbol hold storage information concerning the random number within a predetermined number,
The effect control means is
While receiving the effect control information based on the special symbol suspension storage information from the main control means, it is possible to execute pre-reading effect,
It is possible to determine a list effect that causes the image display means to list a plurality of characters in a predetermined arrangement order,
The arrangement order of the characters is determined by a predetermined first sort and a second sort based on a rule different from the first sort, and the arrangement order of the characters temporarily determined by the first sort is the second sort May be changed by
The effect control means is
A pachinko gaming machine characterized in that the list effect can be executed to straddle the variable display of the special symbol a plurality of times.

Images